Zebra DS9908 Product Reference Guide
જાહેરાત
જાહેરાત
DS9908
Hands-Free Imaging Scanner
MN-003185-06EN Rev. A
Copyright
ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation, registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ©2020 Zebra
Technologies Corporation and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
COPYRIGHTS & TRADEMARKS: For complete copyright and trademark information, go to zebra.com/copyright .
WARRANTY: For complete warranty information, go to zebra.com/warranty .
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT: For complete EULA information, go to zebra.com/eula .
For Australia Only
For Australia Only. This warranty is given by Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd., 71 Robinson Road, #05-
02/03, Singapore 068895, Singapore. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the
Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
Zebra Technologies Corporation Australia’s limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Zebra Technologies
Corporation at +65 6858 0722. You may also visit our website: zebra.com
for the most updated warranty terms.
Terms of Use
• Proprietary Statement
This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries
(“Zebra Technologies”). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra
Technologies.
• Product Improvements
Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
• Liability Disclaimer
Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
• Limitation of Liability
In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production, or delivery of the accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever
(including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to use such product, even if Zebra Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
2
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change
-01 Rev A
-02 Rev A
-03 Rev A
-04 Rev A
Date
10/2018
11/2018
3/2019
10/2020
-05EN Rev A 04/2021
-06EN Rev A 07/2022
Description
Initial release.
- Added HD decode ranges.
- Removed Simple COM Port Emulation.
- Updated:
- Default for Code 128 Security Level
- Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern to Enable
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF.
Added:
- DotCode parameters - with enable as prioritize default.
- Decode Range Limit parameter.
- New Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation note.
Updated:
- Zebra copyright.
- MSI Check Digits parameter to byte.
- RS-232 Host Parameter settings for CUTE: Parity - None; ASCII Format - 8-Bit
- Decode Range Limit Parameter values: Disable - 00h, Standard - 0Bh, Near -
16h, Far - 07h.
- Decode Range Limit -> Decode Range Limit (Hands-free)
Removed:
- Reference to Intellistand.
- Removed Feedback (no longer valid).
Added:
- CDC Beep on <BEL>
- Added TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
- Added new DotCode Erasure Limit
- Re-added Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
- USB Cert information in Table 4-2.
Updated
- 123Scan Requirements
- Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS)
- Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol.
Added Data Parsing.
Added Weblink QR.
3
Table of Contents
4
Table of Contents
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
5
Table of Contents
6
Table of Contents
7
Table of Contents
8
Table of Contents
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar
9
Table of Contents
10
Table of Contents
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking ............................ 256
11
Table of Contents
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device ............................. 259
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information ........................................... 259
12
Table of Contents
13
Table of Contents
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
14
Table of Contents
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
15
Table of Contents
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
16
Table of Contents
Communication Protocol Functionality
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
17
Table of Contents
18
Table of Contents
19
List of Figures
20
List of Tables
21
List of Tables
22
About This Guide
Introduction
The DS9908 scanner Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting the DS9908 scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes the DS9908 scanner configurations listed in
Table 1 DS9908 Scanner Only Configurations
Configuration
DS9908-DL00004ZZNA
Description
Presentation Area Imager, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black - North America
Only
DS9908-DL00004ZCNA Presentation Area Imager, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint EAS -
North America Only
DS9908-HD4000WZTWW Presentation Area Imager, High Density, Corded, Alpine White, TAA Compliant
DS9908-HD4000WZZWW Presentation Area Imager, High Density, Corded, Alpine White
DS9908-HD4000WZZY
DS9908-HL4000WZZNA
Presentation Area Imager, High Density, Corded, Alpine White - India Only
Presentation Area Imager, High Density With DL Parsing, Corded, Alpine White -
North America Only
DS9908-SR00004ZZY Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black - India Only
DS9908-SR00004ZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9908-SR00004ZCWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint
EAS
DS9908-TT00004ZZJP Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range With Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight
Black - Japan Only
DS9908-TT00004ZCJP Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range With Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight
Black, Checkpoint EAS - Japan Only
23
About This Guide
Accessories
NOTE : Check Solution Builder for additional information regarding all available accessories, and the latest available configurations.
The scanner ships with the DS9908 Quick Start Guide. The following required accessories must be ordered:
• Interface cable for the appropriate interface. For example, a shielded connector cable when connecting via
USB.
IMPORTANT : If you already have existing non shielded cables from legacy products (such as the
DS9808) they can be reused. However, be aware that the shielded cables provide improved ESD performance.
• Universal power supply, if the interface requires this.
The product configurations related to the DS9908 scanner are listed in
Table 2 Scanner Accessories
Product Type
Cables
Part Number Description
For information about cables, cable compatibility, and the full list of supported cables go to the
Zebra Partner Portal at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scann ers/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx
.
BRKT-MM0099C-04 Stands and
Holders
(optional)
Power Supplies
(if required)
PWR-WUA5V4W0US
PWR-WUA5V4W0BR
DS9908 Multi-mount bracket, Black. Can be used as wall mount
or table mount. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33
for installation instructions.
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, US/CA/MX/JP/TW
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, KR (Korea)
PWR-WUA5V4W0EU
PWR-WUA5V4W0CN
PWR-WUA5V4W0AU
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, EU/UK
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, CN
Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, HK/AU
24
About This Guide
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
•
•
123Scan and Software Tools describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner
operation.
•
describes parts of the scanner, speaker and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner in hand-held and hands-free (presentation) modes.
•
scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
•
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options describes features frequently used to customize how data
transmits to the host device and programming barcodes for selecting user preference features for the scanner.
•
Imager Preferences provides imaging preference features and programming barcodes for selecting these
features.
•
Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these
features for the scanner.
•
describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host.
•
communications link between Zebra decoders and a serial host.
•
describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host, such as point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.
•
describes how to set up the scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems.
•
describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the scanner.
•
describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming.
•
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
describes IDC, an advanced image processing firmware, including IDC functionality, parameter barcodes to control its features, and a quick start procedure.
•
invisible to people.
•
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol briefly describes the Zebra features available for
customizing scanner operation.
•
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
describes how the DS9908-DL scanner can parse out information from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle
Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
•
Custom Tone provides information about downloading a custom tone to sound when a good decode
occurs.
•
provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults.
•
includes the numeric barcodes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric values.
•
includes the barcodes representing the alphanumeric keyboard, used when setting ADF rules.
•
provides ASCII character value tables.
25
About This Guide
•
provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and keyboard maps.
•
•
provides barcodes for programming the country keyboard type for the USB keyboard (HID) device and the keyboard wedge host.
•
provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type.
•
describes control parameters for Unicode/CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
•
area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.
•
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary) defines non-parameter attributes.
•
barcodes that slow down processes.
•
includes sample barcodes of various code types.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
• Bold text is used to highlight the following:
• Dialog box, window and screen names
• Drop-down list and list box names
• Check box and radio button names
• Icons on a screen
• Key names on a keypad
• Button names on a screen.
• Bullets (•) indicate:
• Action items
• Lists of alternatives
• Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
• Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
26
About This Guide
Related Documents and Software
• DS9908 Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-003189-xx, provides general information for getting started with the
DS9908 scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
• Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx - provides information on ADF, a means of customizing data before transmission to a host.
• Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol (MDF) User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx, provides programming instructions for using MDF and Preferred Symbol on the DS9908 scanner.
• Plural Stage Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-67113-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9908 scanner to decode Plural Stage barcodes and enable Supplemental Recognition Characters.
• Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide, p/n MN-002707-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9908 scanner for the Toshiba TEC host.
For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: zebra.com/support .
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Zebra Global Customer Support for your region. Contact information is available at: zebra.com/support .
When contacting support, please have the following information available:
• Serial number of the unit
• Model number or product name
• Software type and version number.
Zebra responds to calls by email, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra Customer Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.
If you purchased your Zebra business product from a Zebra business partner, contact that business partner for support.
27
Getting Started
Introduction
The Zebra DS9908 is the newest generation premium hybrid hand-held/hands-free imager.
The DS9908 combines superior 1D and 2D barcode scanning with advanced imaging applications in a light-weight, hands-free/hand-held design. Its unique design offers the performance of a hands-free presentation scanner and the flexibility of a hand-held. The DS9908 automatically switches between hands-free and hand-held modes seamlessly accommodating both presentation and hand-held triggered operation.
Figure 1 DS9908 Scanner
28
Getting Started
Interfaces
NOTE :
The DS9908 scanner supports:
• USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming barcode menus.This interface supports the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter
.
• Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with the host.
• Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with the IBM terminal.
• Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with the host. This interface supports the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter
Unpacking
Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit, contact
support. See page 27 for contact information.
KEEP THE PACKING . It is the approved shipping container; use this to return the equipment for servicing.
29
Features
Figure 2 Parts of the Scanner
LED
Getting Started
Scan
Window
Trigger
Speaker
Hand-held Touch
Zones
(Toggle Between
Hand-held and
Hands-free Modes)
Cable release opening
(pinhole)
Interface Cable
Port
Finger
Ridge
NOTE : The hand-held touch zones are touch sensitive areas that enable the scanner to determine if it is sitting on the counter or picked up by the user. To activate the touch zones, fingers must be placed in the zone above the finger ridges on both sides of the scanner. See
for proper finger placement.
30
Getting Started
Setting Up the Scanner
Inserting the Interface Cable
1.
NOTE : Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.
Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom of the scanner handle
). It is recommended to rotate/ratchet the scanner all the way forward and then insert the cable.
IMPORTANT : If you already have existing non shielded cables from legacy products (such as the DS9808) they can be reused. However, be aware that the shielded cables provide improved ESD performance. For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner
Portal at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scan ners/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx
.
Figure 3 Inserting the Cable
Interface cable modular connector
Clip
Interface cable port
To host
2.
3.
Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is secure.
Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host connections).
31
Getting Started
Removing the Interface Cable
Figure 4 Removing the Cable
1 2
Flat surface
3 4
Cable release opening (pinhole)
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
Place the scanner on a flat surface.
Ratchet the scanner all the way forward.
Insert a paper clip into the circular cable release opening (pinhole) to compress the modular connector clip.
Pull the cable/connector UP and OUT of the connection and carefully slide out the cable.
Follow the steps for Inserting the Interface Cable
to connect a new cable.
Connecting Power (if required)
2.
3.
If the host does not provide power to the scanner, connect an external power supply:
1.
Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into an AC outlet.
Configuring the Scanner
To configure the scanner use the barcodes included in this manual. See
User Preferences & Miscellaneous
Imager Preferences for information about programming the scanner using barcode menus. Also see
each host-specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type.
32
Getting Started
Mounting the Scanner
The optional multi-mount bracket is required when mounting the scanner to a table top or wall (or other vertical surface). When mounting to a table top, use either screws or the adhesive pad. When mounting to a wall (or other vertical surface) screws are required.
NOTE : When mounting to a table top screws are more secure than the adhesive pad.
Table Top Mount With Adhesive Pad
Figure 5 Mounting With Adhesive On a Table Top
Peel Off
Table Top
1.
2.
3.
To mount the optional multi-mount bracket using the adhesive pad:
4.
Clean the table top surface with Isopropyl alcohol to remove any dirt or debris.
Peel the corner of the paper liner off the tape on the bottom of the multi-mount bracket (
Press the bottom of the multi-mount bracket on the flat table top and apply uniform pressure for minimally 10 seconds to secure it to the surface (
).
Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket ( Figure 7 ).
33
Getting Started
Table Top Mount With Screws
1.
2.
To mount the optional multi-mount bracket with screws:
Place the bracket in the desired location on the table top.
Insert three #6 screws (not included) through each screw hole in the bracket.
Figure 6 Insert Three Screws
3.
4.
Screw into place until secure.
Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket.
Figure 7 Insert the Scanner
34
Getting Started
Mounting on a Wall
To mount the DS9908 on a wall:
1.
Place the bracket in its desired location on the wall and insert three #6 screws (not included) through each screw hole in the bracket.
Figure 8 Installing the Multi-Mount Bracket
2.
3.
Tighten the screws to secure the bracket to the wall.
Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket, oriented so the scan window faces down (
Figure 9 Insert the Scanner
).
35
123Scan and Software
Tools
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.
123Scan
123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more.
Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process.
Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming barcode for scanning, emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable.
Through 123Scan a user can:
• Configure a scanner using a wizard.
• Program the following scanner settings.
• Speaker tone / volume settings.
• Enable / disable symbologies.
• Communication settings.
• Modify data before transmission to a host using:
• Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one barcode per trigger pull.
• Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) - Scan many barcodes in one trigger pull (select scanners).
• Preferred Symbol - Single out one barcode on label of many (select scanners).
• Load parameter settings to a scanner via the following.
• Barcode scanning.
• Scan a paper barcode.
• Scan a barcode from a PC screen.
• Scan a barcode from a smart phone screen.
• Download over a USB cable.
• Load settings to one scanner.
• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
36
123Scan and Software Tools
• Validate scanner setup.
• View scanned data within the utility's Data view screen.
• Capture an image and save to a PC within the utility's Data view screen.
• Review settings using the Parameter Report.
• Clone settings from an already deployed scanner from the Start screen.
• Upgrade scanner firmware.
• Load settings to one scanner.
• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
• View statistics such as:
• Asset tracking information.
• Time and usage information.
• Barcodes scanned by symbology.
• Battery diagnostics (select scanners).
• Generate the following reports.
• Barcode Report - Programming barcode, included parameter settings, and supported scanner models.
• Parameter Report - Parameters programmed within a configuration file.
• Inventory Report - Scanner asset tracking information.
• Validation Report - Scanned data from the Data view.
• Statistics Report - All statistics retrieved from the scanner.
For more information go to: zebra.com/123Scan .
Communication with 123Scan
Use a USB cable to connect the scanner to a Windows host computer running 123Scan.
123Scan Requirements
• Host computer running Windows 7, 8, and 10
• Scanner
• USB cable.
123Scan Information
For more information on123Scan, go to: zebra.com/123Scan .
For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos .
To see a list of all of our software tools, go to: zebra.com/scannersoftware .
37
123Scan and Software Tools
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos
Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management, these tools help you every step of the way.
To download any of the following free tools, go to: zebra.com/scannersoftware .
• 123Scan configuration utility
• SDKs
• Scanner SDK for Windows
• Scanner SDK for Linux
• Scanner SDK for Android
• Drivers
• OPOS driver
• JPOS driver
• USB CDC driver
• TWAIN driver
• Scanner Management Service (SMS) for Remote Management
• Windows
• Linux
• How-To-Videos
NOTE : For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see
38
Data Capture
Introduction
This chapter provides speaker and LED definitions, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone diagrams.
Speaker and LED Indicators
In addition to beep sequences, the scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status.
• The DS9908 scanner includes one LED indicator for system/decode indications.
defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner; LED colors that display during scanning.
Table 3 Scanner Speaker and LED Indications
Speaker Sequence
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps Green
LED
Medium beep
(or as configured)
Green
None
None
Four long low beeps
Green (solid)
No LED (green LED is turned off)
Red
Five long low beeps
None
Red
Red (blinking) on trigger pull
Indication
Power up.
A barcode was successfully decoded. (See User
Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 57
for programming speaker sounds.)
Presentation (Hands-free) Mode on.
Presentation (Hands-free) Mode off.
A transmission error occurred. The data is ignored. This occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option setting.
Conversion or format error.
Scanner is disabled by a host command to the scanner.
Image Capture
Low beep Green (blinking) Snapshot mode started.
39
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Speaker and LED Indications (Continued)
Speaker Sequence
Low beep
LED
Default Green LED based upon hand-held or hands-free mode
High/low beeps Default Green LED based upon hand-held or hands-free mode
Parameter Programming
Long low/long high beeps Red
Indication
Snapshot mode completed.
Snapshot mode timed-out.
High/low beeps
High/low/high/low beeps
Green
Green
Input error; incorrect barcode or Cancel scanned, wrong entry, incorrect barcode programming sequence; remain in program mode.
Number expected. Enter value using numeric barcodes.
Successful program exit with change in the parameter setting.
ADF Programming
Low/high/low beeps
High/low beeps
None
Green
Low/low beeps
High/high beeps
High/low/low beeps
High/low/high/low beeps
Green
Green blinking
Green
Green
(turns off after blinking)
Long low/long high beeps Red
ADF transmit error.
Number expected. Enter another digit. Add leading zeros to the front if necessary.
Alphanumeric expected. Enter another alphanumeric character or scan the End of Message barcode.
ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criteria or action or scan the Save Rule barcode.
All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue entering rule.
Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
Low beep
Low/high/high beeps
Long low/long high/long low/long high beeps
Long low/long high/long low beeps
Green
Green
Red
Green
(turns off after blinking)
Rule error. Entry error, wrong barcode scanned, or criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criteria or action.
Deleted last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
All rules deleted.
Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try to save rule again.
Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an error or the user asked to exit rule entry.
Host Specific
USB only
Four high beeps None Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several seconds and scan again.
RS-232 only
Low/low/low/extra low beeps
High beep
Red
None
RS-232 receive error (parity error).
A <BEL> character is received when Beep on <BEL> is enabled (Point-to-Point mode only).
40
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Speaker and LED Indications (Continued)
Speaker Sequence LED Indication
123Scan only (When in use, the utility controls the scanner LED)
None Green (slow blinking) Scanner connected to 123Scan.
None Red (fast blinking)
None Red (slow blinking)
File being transferred to the scanner (parameters and firmware).
Firmware being activated on the scanner, loaded into memory.
None
None
SMS only
None
Green (solid)
Red (solid)
Red (blinking)
Programming completed successfully (parameters and firmware).
Error state.
Loading the SMS package to scanner.
Maintenance Indications
High/high beeps
None
Macro PDF
Low/low beeps
Red (stays on)
Red (blinking)
None
Enter Bootloader.
Firmware installation.
Long low/long low beeps
(2 long low beeps)
Long low/long low/long low beeps (3 long low beeps)
Long low/long low/long low/long low beeps (4 long low beeps)
None
None
None
None
Buffered File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF sequence was scanned.
Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store the current MPDF symbol.
Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D barcode in an
MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in an incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal
MPDF field.
Flushing MPDF buffer.
Long low/long low/long low/long low/long low beeps (5 long low beeps)
Fast Warble
Low/high beeps
None
None
Aborting MPDF sequence.
Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
41
Data Capture
Scanning
The DS9908 has a built-in, light-weight stand to easily accommodate both hands-free (presentation) and hand-held scanning.
Scanning features include hand-held touch zones which are touch sensitive areas that switch the scanner between hand-held and hands-free modes (see
Parts of the Scanner on page 30 ). To enable the touch zones, fingers must
be placed in the zone above the finger ridges on both sides of the scanner. See
for proper finger placement.
NOTE : SR and DL models emit red illumination and a red aiming dot.
HD and HL models emit white illumination and green aiming dot.
Hands-free Scanning
The scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it sits on a counter top, or when it is mounted on a wall using the multi-mount bracket. In this mode, the scanner operates in continuous (constant-on) mode, where it automatically decodes a barcode presented in its field of view.
In hands-free mode the LED indicator turns solid green. An aiming dot may appear.
Figure 10 Scanning in Hands-free Mode
Hand-held Scanning
When lifted off the counter or removed from the multi-mount bracket, the scanner operates in standard trigger mode. Aim the scanner at a barcode and pull the trigger to decode.
In hand-held mode the LED indicator turns off. An aiming dot may appear.
42
Figure 11 Scanning in Hand-held Mode
Data Capture
Aiming
The scanner may project an LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within its field of view. See
Ranges on page 44 for the proper distance to achieve between the scanner and a barcode.
Figure 12 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Dot
show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 13 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming
The aiming dot is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol.
Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those with larger bars or elements
(mil size) farther from the scanner.
The scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the barcode. For more information on speaker and LED
definitions, see Table 3 on page 39
.
43
Data Capture
Decode Ranges
DS9908-SR/DL/HD/HL Configurations
Table 4 Typical Ranges
Code Type
Code 39
Symbol
Density
3 mil
Code 128
100% UPC
PDF417
20 mil
3 mil
5 mil
15 mil
13 mil
5 mil
6.67 mil
Data Matrix 5.0 mil
QR Code
7.5 mil
10 mil
10 mil
20 mil
Range
SR/DL
(cm/in) near 2.9 cm / 1.1 in far 7.7 cm / 3.0 in near 2.5 cm / 1.0 in far 109.1 cm / 42.9 in near 3.5 cm / 1.4 in far 9.0 cm / 3.5 in near 2.6 cm / 1.0 in
Configuration
HD/HL
(cm/in)
3.4 cm / 1.3 in
9.5 cm / 3.7 in
0.8 cm / 0.3 in
67.6 cm / 26.6 in
3.7 cm / 1.4 in
10.6 cm / 4.2 in
1.9 cm / 0.8 in far 18.1 cm / 7.1 in near 2.6 cm / 1.0 in far 70.3 cm / 27.7 in near 0.0 cm / 0.0 in far 62.6 cm / 24.7 in near 3.6 cm / 1.4 in far 12.7 cm / 5.0 in
19.0 cm / 7.5 in
2.6 cm / 1.0 in
50.8 cm / 20.0 in
0.0 cm / 0.0 in
48.5 cm / 19.1 in near 3.1 cm / 1.2 in far 20.2 cm / 8.0 in near N/A far N/A near 3.0 cm / 1.2 in far 17.4 cm / 6.9 in near 3.3 cm / 1.3 in far 23.6 cm / 9.3 in
3.2 cm / 1.2 in
14.5 cm / 5.7 in
2.1 cm / 0.8 in
20.2 cm / 8.0 in
6.8 cm / 2.7 in
9.1 cm / 3.6 in
3.2 cm/ 1.3 in
16.6 cm / 6.5 in near 2.5 cm / 1.0 in far 19.3 cm / 7.6 in near 2.6 cm / 1.0 in far 45.7 cm / 18.0 in
1.2 cm / 0.5 in
23.7 cm / 9.3 in
1.3 cm / 0.5 in
18.4 cm / 7.2 in
0.0 cm / 0.0 in
34.8 cm / 13.7 in
44
Data Capture
Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS)
NOTE : EAS is available only on scanner models that support Checkpoint EAS.
Some scanner configurations include an integrated Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) antenna.
The scanner's integrated EAS deactivation antenna requires an EAS host cable. This Y-cable connects to the scanner's host port at one end, and splits to the host and the EAS system at the other end.
Installing
Checkpoint EAS Model Compatibility
The scanner is intended for use with Checkpoint CP-VII, CP-IX, and CP-XI systems. It does not support CP-IV and other low-power receiver-based EAS deactivation systems.
Considerations
The Checkpoint CP-VII system generates a periodic burst of electromagnetic energy that deactivates EAS tags brought near the scanner. To avoid interference with the scanner’s operation, take the following precautions when installing the EAS system:
• Position the EAS antenna box as far as possible from the scanner (at least 6 in. / 15.24 cm.)
• Position the EAS antenna, EAS antenna box, EAS control cable, and EAS controller box as far as possible from the scanner’s host and power cables.
EAS range is as dependent on the Checkpoint system (which is calibrated onsite) as it is on the scanner.
Therefore, we cannot provide estimated ranges, however these are some of the factors that contribute to EAS range:
• Antenna – Length, gauge, number of turns, placement in the scanner.
• Type of Checkpoint EAS system used (ie. CP-VII, CP-IX, and CP-XI).
• Length of wire connecting antenna to (Checkpoint) EAS (site/installation dependent)
• Settings done within Checkpoint system (site/installation dependent).
Checkpoint Contact Information
Contact your local Checkpoint representative to install the EAS cable to the Checkpoint Deactivation System.
45
Maintenance,
Troubleshooting, and
Technical Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Known Harmful Ingredients
The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with the device:
• Acetone
• Ammonia solutions
• Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions
• Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons
• Benzene
• Carbolic acid
• Compounds of amines or ammonia
• Ethanolamine
• Ethers
• Ketones
• TB-lysoform
• Toluene
• Trichloroethylene.
Approved Cleaners for the Scanner
• Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including pre-moistened wipes).
46
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Cleaning the Scanner
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.
To clean the scanner:
3.
Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes.
Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window, trigger, cable connector or any other area on the device.
Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach tight or inaccessible areas).
Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window.
Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses.
Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking.
Allow the unit to air dry before use.
Scanner connectors: a.
Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol.
b.
c.
d.
Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector.
Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area.
Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.
47
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Troubleshooting
NOTE : If after performing the possible solutions in
Table 5 the scanner still experiences problems, contact the
distributor or call support.
Table 5 Troubleshooting
The illumination does not appear when pressing the trigger.
Problem
Scanner emits illumination, but does not decode the barcode.
Possible Causes
No power to the scanner.
Scanner is not programmed for the correct barcode type.
Barcode symbol is unreadable.
Possible Solutions
If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.
Connect the correct host interface cable. Incorrect host interface cable is used.
Interface/power cables are loose.
Re-connect cables.
Scanner is disabled.
For IBM 468x and USB IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS modes, enable the scanner via the host interface. Otherwise, see the technical person in charge of scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode,
CTS is not asserted.
Illumination is disabled.
Assert CTS line.
Enable the illumination. See Hand-held
Decode Aiming Pattern on page 72 .
Program the scanner to read that type of barcode. See
The symbol is not completely inside illumination.
Distance between scanner and barcode is incorrect.
Scan test symbols of the same barcode type to determine if the barcode is defaced.
Move the symbol completely within the illumination.
Move the symbol completely within the field of view (AIM pattern does NOT define FOV)
Move the scanner closer to or further from the barcode. See
.
48
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Scanner decodes barcode, but does not transmit the data to the host.
Scanner is not programmed for the correct host type.
Interface cable is loose.
If the scanner emits four long low beeps, a transmission error occurred.
This occurs if a unit is not properly configured or connected to the wrong host type.
Host displays scanned data incorrectly.
If the scanner emits 5 low beeps, a conversion or format error occurred.
If the scanner emits low/high/low beeps, it detected an invalid ADF rule.
Scanner is not programmed to work with the host.
Possible Solutions
Scan the appropriate host type programming barcode. See the chapter corresponding to the host type.
Re-connect the cable.
Set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's setting.
Configure the scanner's conversion parameters properly.
The USB bus may put the scanner in a state where power to the scanner is cycled on and off more than once.
Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide.
Scan the appropriate host type programming barcode.
For RS-232, set the scanner's communication parameters to match the host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration, program the system for the correct keyboard type, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g.,
UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Normal during host reset.
Scanner emits short low/short medium/short high beep sequence
(power-up beep sequence) more than once.
Scanner emits 4 short high beeps during decode attempt.
Scanner emits
Low/low/low/extra low beeps when not in use.
Scanner emits low/high beeps during programming.
Scanner has not completed USB initialization.
RS-232 receive error.
Input error, incorrect barcode or
Cancel barcode was scanned.
Wait several seconds and scan again.
Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host setting.
Scan the correct numeric barcodes within range for the parameter programmed.
49
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)
Problem Possible Causes
Scanner emits low/high/low/high beeps during programming.
Out of host parameter storage space.
Out of memory for ADF rules.
Scan
Possible Solutions
.
Scanner emits low/high/low beeps.
During programming, indicates out of ADF parameter storage space.
ADF transmit error.
Invalid ADF rule is detected.
Reduce the number of ADF rules or the number of steps in the ADF rules.
Erase all rules and re-program with shorter rules.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting
Guide for information.
Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting
Guide for information.
Normal when changing USB host type.
Scanner emits a power-up beep after changing USB host type.
Scanner emits one high beep when not in use.
Scanner emits frequent beeps.
Scanner emits five long low beeps after a barcode is decoded.
The USB bus re-established power to the scanner.
In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> character was received and Beep on <BEL> option is enabled.
No power to the scanner.
Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled and the scanner is in RS-232 mode.
Incorrect host interface cable is used.
Check the system power. If the configuration requires a power supply, re-connect the power supply.
Verify that the correct host interface cable is used. If not, connect the correct host interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose.
Check for loose cable connections and re-connect cables.
Conversion or format error was detected.
The scanner conversion parameters are not properly configured.
Ensure the scanner conversion parameters are properly configured.
Change the ADF rule, or change to a host that can support the ADF rule.
Conversion or format error was detected.
An ADF rule was set up with characters that can't be sent for the host selected.
Conversion or format error was detected.
A barcode was scanned with characters that can't be sent for that host.
Change the barcode, or change to a host that can support the barcode.
50
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Report Product Information
Report Software Version
Scan the following barcode to send the version of software installed in the scanner.
Report Software Version
Report Serial Number
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner serial number to the host.
Serial Number
Report Manufacturing Information
Scan the following barcode to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host.
Manufacturing Information
51
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications
Item
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions (SR, DL, and HD models)
Description
Weight (SR, DL, and HD models)
8 in. (max) H x 5.2 in. L x 3.7 in. W
20.3 cm (max) H x 13.2 cm L x 9.4 cm W
11.6 oz.
330 g
Available Colors
Supported Host Interfaces
USB Certification
Keyboard Support
User Indicators
Midnight Black (SR/DL model only), Alpine White (HD/HL model only)
USB, RS232, Keyboard Wedge, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
DS9908 is USB2.0 Full Speed Compliant, visit USB.org
for more details.
Supports over 90 international keyboards
Direct Decode Indicator, Good Decode LEDs, Rear View LEDs,
Speaker (Adjustable Tone & Volume), Hand-held Touch Zones
Electrical Characteristics
Supply Voltage
SR and DL Models
Minimum Typical
4.5
5.0
Maximum
5.5
Unit
V
Idle current (Hand-held)
Idle current (Hands-free)
Scanning current (Hand-held)
Scanning current (Hands-free)
70
132
321
297 mA mA
Supply Voltage
HD Models
Minimum Typical
4.5
5.0
Maximum
5.5
Unit
V mA mA
52
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item
Idle current (Hand-held)
Idle current (Hands-free)
Scanning current (Hand-held)
Scanning current (Hands-free)
70
136
356
330
Description mA mA mA mA
Performance Characteristics
Aiming Dot
DS9908-SR/DL
DS9908-HD/HL
Illumination
DS9908-SR/DL
DS9908-HD/HL
Field of View
(Horizontal x Vertical) Nominal
Image Sensor
Minimum Print Contrast
Skew Tolerance
Pitch Tolerance
Roll Tolerance
Image Capture
Graphics Format Support
Resolution (A4 document)
User Environment
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Drop Specifications
Tumble Specification (Scanner)
Ambient Light Immunity
Amber 617nm LED
True Green 528nm LED
Deep Red 657nm LED
Warm White 2700K LED
48° H x 30.6° V
1280 x 800 pixels
16% minimum reflective difference
+/- 60°
+/- 60°
0-360°
Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG, or TIFF
109 PPI
32º F to 122º F (0º C to 50º C)
-40° to 158°F / -40° to 70°C
5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Designed to withstand multiple drops at 5.0 ft/1.5 m to concrete
Designed to withstand 2,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0.5 m tumbler
0 to 9000 Foot Candles/0 to 96,840 Lux
53
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)
Item
Environmental Sealing
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Description
IP52
ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Direct, +/-8 KV
Indirect
Symbol Decode Capability
1D
2D
Digimarc
Minimum Element Resolution
Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI,
UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base 32 (Italian
Pharma)
PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec,
Data Matrix, MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal
Codes
Digital watermark technology
Code 39 3 mil
UPC 40% 5.2 mil
PDF417 4 mil
Data Matrix 6 mil
See Decode Ranges on page 44 for typical working ranges.
Utilities and Management
123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK
Scanner Management Service (SMS)
Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides scanned barcode data and prints reports. See
.
zebra.com/123Scan
Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including documentation, drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset information.
zebra.com/sms
54
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications
Scanner Signal Descriptions
Figure 14 Scanner Cable Pinouts
Pin 10 Pin 1
The signal descriptions in Table 7
apply to the connectors on the DS9908 scanner and are for reference only.
Table 7 DS9908 Scanner Signal Pin-outs
Pin
1 Cable ID
IBM RS-232
Cable ID
2
3
Power (+5V)
Ground
Power (+5V)
Ground
IBM_OUT TxD
6
7
4
5 IBM_IN
IBM_T/R
Reserved
RxD
RTS
CTS
Keyboard Wedge
Cable ID
Power (+5V)
Ground
KeyClock
TermData
KeyData
TermClock
Cable ID
Ground
Reserved
D +
Reserved
D -
USB
Power (+5V)
8
9
Reserved Reserved Reserved
See note
Reserved
10 See note
Note: EAS configurations use pins 9 and 10 for an EAS antenna. For other configurations pins 9 and 10 are open.
55
User Preferences &
Miscellaneous Options
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes user preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in
for all defaults). If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see menus, asterisks indicate (
*
) default values.
Default Parameters on page 59 . Throughout the programming barcode
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
(1) Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the speaker tone to high, scan the High Frequency
(beep tone) barcode listed under Beep Tone on page 62 . The scanner issues a fast warble
beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
56
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults
Table 8 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Standard User Preferences
Set Default Parameter N/A
Parameter Barcode Scanning
Beep After Good Decode
Beep Volume
Beep Tone
Beep Duration
Suppress Power Up Beeps
236
56
140
145
628
721
SSI
Number
N/A
ECh
38h
8Ch
91h
F1h 74h
F1h D1h
F2h 5Bh
2
Default
N/A
Enable
Enable
High
Medium
Short
Do Not Suppress
Disable Direct Decode Indicator
Low Power Mode
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Trigger Mode (or Hand-held Trigger
Mode)
Hands-free Mode
Pickup Activation
859
128
146
138
80h
92h
8Ah
Disable
1 Hour
Auto Aim
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming
Pattern
630
1927
306
590
F1h 76h Enable
F8h 07h 87h Touch Plus
F0h 32h
F1h 4Eh
Enable
Disable Presentation
(Hands-free) Decode
Aiming Pattern
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
57
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h
Continuous Barcode Read
Unique Barcode Reporting
Decode Session Timeout
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
649
723
136
400
137
F1h 89h
F1h D3h
88h
F0 90
89h
Default
Disable Picklist Mode
Always
Disable
Enable
9.9 Seconds
15
0.5 Seconds Timeout Between Decodes, Same
Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different
Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
PDF Prioritization
PDF Prioritization Timeout
Decoding Illumination
Illumination Brightness
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger
Mode Only)
Product ID (PID) Type
Product ID (PID) Value
ECLevel
Decode Range Limit (Hands-free)
144
724
716
719
720
298
669
858
90h
F1h D4h
F1h CCh
F1h CFh
F1h D0h
F0h 2Ah
F1h 9Dh
F2h 5Ah
0.1 Seconds
Disable
Normal
Disable
200 ms
Enable
High
Less Motion Tolerance
1281
1725
1710
1950
F8h 05h 01h
F8h 07h 9Eh
Host Type Unique
F8h 06h BDh 0
F8h 06h AEh 0
Standard
Miscellaneous Options
Enter Key
Tab Key
Transmit Code ID Character
Prefix Value
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value
N/A
N/A
45
99, 105
98, 104
100, 106
N/A
N/A
2Dh
63h, 69h
62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah
N/A
N/A
None
7013 <CR><LF>
7013 <CR><LF>
Scan Data Transmission Format
FN1 Substitution Values
235
103, 109
EBh
67h, 6Dh
Data As Is
7013 <CR><LF>
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
58
Page
Number
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Transmit “No Read” Message
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
94
1118
5E Disable
F8h 04h 5Eh Disable
Default securPharm Decoding securPharm Output Formatting
1752
1753
F8h 06h D8h
F8h 06h D9h
Disable
No Formatting
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
Standard User Preferences
Default Parameters
Scan one of the following barcodes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows:
• Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows:
• If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults barcode, scanning the Restore Defaults barcode restores these custom values.
• If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults barcode
restores the factory default values. See Parameter Defaults
for these values.
• Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See
for these values .
Write to Custom Defaults
To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to
Custom Defaults .
Restore Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
59
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Parameter Barcode Scanning
Parameter # 236
SSI # ECh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter barcodes, including the Set Defaults barcodes.
*
Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning
(1)
Disable Parameter Barcode Scanning
(0)
Beep After Good Decode
Parameter # 56
SSI # 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode.
If you select Do Not Beep After Good Decode , the speaker still operates during parameter menu scanning and to indicate error conditions.
*
Enable Beep After Good Decode
(1)
Disable Beep After Good Decode
(0)
60
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Volume
Parameter # 140
SSI # 8Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep volume.
Low Volume
(2)
Medium Volume
(1)
*
High Volume
(0)
61
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Tone
Parameter # 145
SSI # 91h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep tone for audible feedback indicating a good decode. Select
below or from the Special Tones on page 63
.
Scan Disable Beep Tone to disable all tones.
Disable Beep Tone
(3)
Standard Beep Tones
Low Beep Tone
(2)
*
Medium Beep Tone
(1)
High Beep Tone
(0)
Medium to High Beep Tone (2-tone)
(4)
62
Special Tones
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Wood Block / Tone 1
(6)
Pulse / Tone 2
(7)
Chime / Tone 3
(8)
Zap / Tone 4
(9)
Triple Beep / Tone 5
(10)
User Programmable / Tone 6
(11)
Note:
to download a custom tone.
63
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Beep Duration
Parameter # 628
SSI # F1h 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the duration for the good decode beep.
*
Short Duration
(0)
Medium Duration
(1)
Long Duration
(2)
Suppress Power Up Beeps
Parameter # 721
SSI # F1h D1h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner’s power-up beeps.
*
Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps
(0)
Suppress Power Up Beeps
(1)
64
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Direct Decode Indicator
Parameter # 859
SSI # F2h 5Bh
following barcodes to select optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode if you continue to hold the trigger. If you release the trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional feedback for a successful decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.
• *Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode.
• 1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode.
• 2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.
*
Disable Direct Decode Indicator
(0)
1 Blink
(1)
2 Blinks
(2)
65
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Low Power Mode
Parameter # 128
SSI # 80h
NOTE : The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when
Hand-held Trigger Mode on page 69
is set to Level (Standard) .
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections. If disabled, power remains on after each decode attempt.
If you enable this, see
to set the inactivity time period.
Enable Low Power Mode
(1)
*
Disable Low Power Mode
(0)
66
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Parameter # 146
SSI # 92h
NOTE :
This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode
is enabled.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the time the scanner remains active before entering low power mode.
The scanner wakes upon trigger press or when the host attempts to communicate with the scanner.
1 Second
(17)
10 Seconds
(26)
1 Minute
(33)
5 Minutes
(37)
15 Minutes
(43)
67
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
30 Minutes
(45)
45 Minutes
(46)
*
1 Hour
(49)
3 Hours
(51)
6 Hours
(54)
9 Hours
(57)
68
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hand-held Trigger Mode
Parameter # 138
SSI # 8Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a trigger mode for the scanner:
• Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the
barcode decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 76 occurs.
• Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a barcode in its field of view. After a period of non-use, the LEDs turn off until the scanner senses motion.
• *Auto Aim - The scanner projects the aiming pattern when lifted. A trigger press activates decode processing. After a period of inactivity the aiming pattern shuts off.
Standard (Level)
(0)
Presentation (Blink)
(7)
*
Auto Aim
(9)
69
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hands-free Mode
Parameter # 630
SSI # F1h 76h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable hands-free mode.
• Enable Hands-free Mode - The scanner automatically triggers when presented with a barcode. Lifting the
• Disable Hands-free Mode - The scanner behaves according to the setting of the
Hand-held Trigger Mode on page 69 regardless of whether it is hand-held or hands-free
.
*
Enable Hands-free Mode
(1)
Disable Hands-free Mode
(0)
70
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Pickup Activation
Parameter # 1927
SSI # F8h 07h 87h
NOTE : When the scanner is picked up it automatically switches into hand-held trigger mode.
There are two different ways to determine if the scanner is picked up: Touch and Touch Plus .
• Touch - The scanner touch sensors in the handle detect when the scanner is physically held. For proper
hand placement see Figure 2 , Hand-held Touch Zones (Toggle Between Hand-held and Hands-free
.
Select this option if you want the scanner to remain in hands-free presentation mode when picked up by its head or base (i.e., avoiding the hand-held touch zones). This option may be desirable to quickly scan multiple items in a basket or shopping cart.
• Touch Plus (default) - The scanner touch and motion sensors detect when the scanner is physically held or when the scanner moves. The scanner reacts on whichever occurs first. When neither touch nor motion are detected, the scanner returns to hands-free mode.
Select this option if you want the scanner to switch to hand-held trigger mode however it is picked up.
Touch
(0)
*
Touch Plus
(2)
71
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 306
SSI # F0h 32h
NOTE : With
Picklist Mode enabled (page 74 ), the decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the
Hand-held
Decode Aiming Pattern .
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode:
• Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during barcode capture.
• Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
• Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner detects a PDF barcode.
*
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
(2)
Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(3)
72
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 590
SSI # F1h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode:
• Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during barcode capture.
• Disable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
• Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner detects a PDF barcode.
NOTE :
enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes even when you disable the Hands-free Decode Aiming Pattern .
Enable Presentation (Hands-free)
Decode Aiming Pattern
(1)
*
Disable Presentation (Hands-free)
Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
Enable Presentation (Hands-free)
Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(2)
73
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Picklist Mode
Parameter # 402
SSI # F0h 92h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Picklist Mode. In this mode, you can pick out and decode a barcode from a group of barcodes that are printed close together by placing the aiming pattern on the barcode you want to decode.
NOTES : Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled.
Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer barcodes.
• Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled.
• Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of hands-free mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode.
• Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free mode only.
NOTE : When using Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode
, increase the time of the Timeout Between Decodes,
• Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.
Enable Picklist Mode Always
(2)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode
(1)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode
(3)
*Disable Picklist Mode Always
(0)
74
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Continuous Barcode Read
Parameter # 649
SSI # F1h 89h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read to report every barcode while the trigger is pressed.
NOTE :
We strongly recommend enabling Picklist Mode on page 74 with this parameter. Disabling Picklist Mode
can cause accidental decodes when more than one barcode is in the scanner's field of view.
Enable Continuous Barcode Read
(1)
*
Disable Continuous Barcode Read
(0)
Unique Barcode Reporting
Parameter # 723
SSI # F1h D3h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read Uniqueness to report only unique barcodes while the trigger is
pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Barcode Read
is enabled.
*
Enable Unique Barcode Reporting
(1)
75
Disable Unique Barcode Reporting
(0)
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 136
SSI # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in
0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.
To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from
a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this barcode, and then scan the error or change the selection, scan
.
0 and 5 barcodes. To correct an
Decode Session Timeout
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
Parameter # 400
SSI # F0 90
This parameter is the hands-free compliment to the Decode Session Timeout . It configures the minimum and maximum decode processing time during a hands-free scan attempt. It only applies to the hands-free trigger mode or when a scanner is place in the gooseneck stand. The default is 15; range = 2 - 255.
The minimum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object is removed or left stationary in the imaging field of view.
The maximum decode processing time is defined as the time in which the scanner stops decoding when an object is left in or is moving in the field of view.
Both the maximum and minimum times are configured using a single setting. The relationship of this setting is as follows:
Setting Value
X < 25
1 Minimum Time
250 ms
X >= 25 X * 10 ms
1 Setting value must be three digits.
Maximum Time
2.5 Seconds
X * 100 ms
For example, a setting value of 100 results in the scanner turning off approximately 1 second after an object is removed from the field of view or 10 seconds while an object is in the field of view moving.
The default value of the setting is 15 which results in a minimum time of 250 ms and maximum time of 2.5 seconds.
Adjust this setting based on your requirements. For example, when doing PDF prioritization, this parameter should be set to a value where the maximum time is above the PDF prioritization timeout.
76
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
Hands-Free Decode Session Timeout
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Parameter # 137
SSI # 89h
Use this option in presentation mode or
Continuous Barcode Read mode to prevent the scanner from continuously
decoding the same barcode when it is left in the scanner’s field of view. The barcode must be out of the field of view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from
that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Parameter # 144
SSI # 90h
Use this option in presentation mode or
Continuous Barcode Read to control the time the scanner waits before
decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is
0.1 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from
that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
NOTE : Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the
77
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
Parameter # 724 (SSI # F1h D4h)
NOTE : This feature does not apply to Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols.
NOTE : Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol cannot be greater than or equal to the Time Delay to Low
Power Mode
Scan Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol below to apply Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
) in hand-held trigger mode. Subsequent scans of Enable Triggered Timeout, Same
Symbol are ignored until Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol expires.
Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
(1)
*
Disable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol
(0)
78
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Mobile Phone/Display Mode
Parameter # 716
SSI # F1h CCh
This mode improves barcode reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the desired mode.
*
Normal Mobile Phone/Display Mode
(0)
Enhanced in Hand-held Mode
(1)
Enhanced in Hands-free Mode
(2)
Enhanced in Both Modes
(3)
79
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
PDF Prioritization
Parameter # 719
SSI # F1h CFh
Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D barcodes (see Note below) by the value specified in
driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the scanner to report it.
This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.
NOTE : The 1D Code 128 barcode lengths include the following:
• 7 to 10 characters
• 14 to 22 characters
• 27 to 28 characters
In addition, a Code 39 barcode with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US driver’s license:
• 8 characters
• 12 characters
Enable PDF Prioritization
(1)
*
Disable PDF Prioritization
(0)
PDF Prioritization Timeout
Parameter # 720
SSI # F1h D0h
symbol before reporting the 1D barcode in the field of view.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes that specify the timeout in
milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following barcode, and then scan 0400. The range is 0 to
5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.
PDF Prioritization Timeout
80
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # 298
SSI # F0h 2Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding.
Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
*
Enable Decoding Illumination
(1)
Disable Decoding Illumination
(0)
Illumination Brightness
Parameter # 669
SSI # F1h 9Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).
NOTE : Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.
Low Illumination Brightness
(0)
Medium Illumination Brightness
(3)
*High Illumination Brightness
(9)
81
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only)
Parameter # 858
SSI # F2h 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a motion tolerance option:
• Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D barcodes.
• More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series of 1D barcodes in rapid progression.
*Less Motion Tolerance
(0)
More Motion Tolerance
(1)
Product ID (PID) Type
Parameter # 1281
SSI # F8h 05h 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.
*Host Type Unique
(0)
Product Unique
(1)
IBM Unique
(2)
82
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Product ID (PID) Value
Parameter # 1725
SSI # F8h 06h BDh
To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value , and then scan four numeric barcodes in
that correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection, scan
Cancel on page 432 . The range is (0,1600-1649).
NOTE : This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global
Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.
Set PID Value
ECLevel
Parameter # 1710
SSI # F8h 06h AEh
To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel
, and then scan five numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that
correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a
selection, scan Cancel on page 432 .
NOTE : This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global
Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows a customer to define an ECLevel value in order to manage and control Flash Update operations on the
4690 operating system.
Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: zebra.com/support for more information.
Set ECLevel
83
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Decode Range Limit (Hands-free)
Parameter # 1950
SSI # F8h 07h 9Eh
This parameter limits the range that the scanner decodes/reports the following symbologies in presentation
(hands-free) mode only.
• UPC/EAN/JAN
• Code 128
• QR Code
Scan a barcode below to select the desired range. The default value is Standard.
• Near - Range is limited so that only nearby barcodes are reported. Used to reduce the chance of inadvertently scanning surrounding barcodes.
• Standard - Range is limited to fit most applications.
• Far - Range is limited slightly so that farther barcodes are also reported.
• Disable - Range is not limited (maximum range).
*Standard
(11)
Disable
(0)
Far
(7)
Near
(22)
84
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters
Enter Key
Scan the following barcode to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data.
To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see
Prefix/Suffix Values on page 87.
Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Tab Key
Scan the following barcode to add a Tab key after scanned data.
Tab Key
85
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit Code ID Character
Parameter # 45
SSI # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned barcode. This is useful when decoding more than one code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters,
see Symbol Code Identifiers on page 462
and AIM Code Identifiers on page 463 .
NOTE : If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable
Message on page 91 , the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character
(2)
AIM Code ID Character
(1)
*
None
(0)
86
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100
SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106
SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
NOTE : To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the
Scan Data Transmission Format on page 88
.
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix
to that value. See
for the four-digit codes.
When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit decimal value. See
for the four-digit codes.
The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection,
Scan Prefix
(7)
Scan Suffix 1
(6)
Scan Suffix 2
(8)
87
Data Format Cancel
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format
Parameter # 235
SSI # EBh
NOTE : If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix .
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following barcodes corresponding to the desired format.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 87
.
*
Data As Is
(0)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(1)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(2)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(3)
88
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA >
(4)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>
(5)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>
(6)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>
(7)
89
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
FN1 Substitution Values
Key Category Parameter # 103
Key Category SSI # 67h
Decimal Value Parameter # 109
Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh
Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any
FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 barcode with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key).
When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via barcode menus:
1.
Scan the following barcode.
Set FN1 Substitution Value
2.
Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four barcodes from
.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel .
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution on page
To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan Enable FN1 Substitution on page
90
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Transmit “No Read” Message
Parameter # 94
SSI # 5Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters.
NOTE : If you enable Transmit No Read , and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID
Character for
Transmit Code ID Character on page 86 , the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to
the NR message.
NOTE : This does not apply in presentation mode.
• Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout
expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 76
.
• Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.
Enable No Read
(1)
*
Disable No Read
(0)
91
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
Parameter # 1118
SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh
The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval barcodes, or scan Set Another
Interval followed by four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired number of seconds.
Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature.
The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:
MOTEVTHB:nnn where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.
10 Seconds
(10)
1 Minute
(60)
Set Another Interval
*
Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval
(0)
92
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Decoding
Parameter # 1752
SSI # F8h 06h D8h
securPharm implements the IFA and GS1 Coding System for the European pharmaceutical industry. securPharm code is used to prevent pharmaceutical counterfeiting.
When this feature is enabled, if a GS1 symbol is decoded and includes any aspects of the Application Identifier associated with the securPharm GS1 specifications, the entire GS1 symbol is processed as a securPharm symbol.
For this reason, it is expected that under certain circumstances, a GS1 barcodes that is a securPharm symbol may not be processed properly; if the GS1 symbol is not created as per the specification. The output cannot be guaranteed as valid.
Although the GS1-128 type and the GS1 DataBar family are not specifically indicated in the IFA specification, they are supported.
The securPharm output is in XML format and can include the product number, serial number, lot number, expiration and Date of Manufacturing. The XML tags can be arranged in any order. Tags that are not in the barcode are omitted. For example:
<content dfi=”value_dfi”>
<Daten_1>value_Daten_1</Daten_1>
<Daten_2>value_Daten_2</Daten_2>
<Daten_n>value_Daten_n</Daten_n>
</content>
Where: value_dfi = IFA or GS1
Daten_1 to Daten_n is the production number, serial number, etc.
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable the ability to process pharmaceutical type barcodes.
*
Disable securPharm Decoding
(0)
Enable securPharm Decoding
(1)
93
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
securPharm Output Formatting
Parameter # 1753
SSI # F8h 06h D9h
NOTE : securPharm output formatting is effective only when
securPharm Decoding on page 93 is enabled.
securPharm Output Formatting parameter options represent bit positions. Therefore, any combination of formatting can be used.
When you scan a securPharm Output Formatting barcode, the securPharm output is formatted in a number of ways.
Sample GS1 Format
Product Number: GTIN Data Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: GS1
<content dfi="GS1">
Data Carrier
FNC1 04150123456782
101A234B5 FNC1
1717231
> Scanned Barcode >
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled
The output has no format:
0104150123456782101A234B517151231211234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)
The output is a single line of characters:
<content dfi="GS1"><gtin>04150123456782</gtin><lot>1A234B5</lot><exp>151231</exp><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)
The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content dfi="GS1">
[tab]
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
[tab]
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab]
<exp>151231</exp>
[tab]
<sn>12345
67890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
94
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
[tab]
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
[tab]
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab]
<exp>151231</exp>
[tab]
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample IFA Format
Product Number: PPNData Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: IFA
Data Carrier
Mac06 9N11123456782 Gs
1T1A234B5 Gs
D151231 Gs
> Scanned Barcode >
<content dfi="IFA">
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled
The output has no format:
[)>069N1112345678421T1A234B5S1234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)
The output is a single line of characters:
<content dfi="IFA"><ppn>111234567842</ppn><lot>1A234B5</lot><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)
The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content dfi="IFA"> [tab] <ppn>111234567842</ppn> [tab] <lot>1A234B5</lot> [tab] <sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
95
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
[tab]
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
[tab]
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab]
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes
Scan a barcode below to format the securPharm output.
*
No Formatting
(0)
Insert Tab
(1)
Insert New Line
(2)
Insert Tab and New Line
(3)
96
Imager Preferences
Introduction
You can program the imager to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes image capture preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
NOTE :
Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device
Type on page 237 to enable this host.
The imager ships with the settings shown in Table 9 on page 98
(also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If
the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
(1) Feature/option
Option value
97
Imager Preferences
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to disable image capture illumination, scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination barcode under
Image Capture Illumination on page 101
. The imager issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes N/A
Image Capture Illumination
Image Capture Autoexposure
361
360
Fixed Exposure
Analog Gain
Digital Gain
Gain / Exposure Priority for Snapshot
Mode
567
1232
1233
562
SSI
Number
N/A
F0h 69h
F4h D0h
F4h D1h
F1h 32h
2
N/A
Enable
F0h 68h Enable
F4h F1h 37h 100
Default
Analog Gain x 2
32
Autodetect
Page
Number
Snapshot Mode Timeout
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
Silence Operational Mode Changes
Image Cropping
323
300
1293
301
F0h 43h
F0h 2Ch
F0h 2Dh
0 (30 seconds)
Enable
F8h 05h 0Dh Disable (do not silence)
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
98
Imager Preferences
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
Crop to Pixel Addresses 315
316
317
318
F4h F0h 3Bh
F4h F0h 3Ch
F4h F0h 3Dh
F4h F0h 3Eh
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
Image Brightness (Target White)
302
390
F0h 2Eh
F0h 86h
JPEG Image Options
JPEG Quality Value
JPEG Size Value
Image Enhancement
299
305
561
564
F0h 2Bh
F0h 31h
F1h 31h
F1h 34h
Image File Format Selection
Image Rotation
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
Signature Capture
Signature Capture Image File Format
Selection
304
665
303
93
313
F0h 30h
F1h 99h
F0h 2Fh
5Dh
F0h 39h
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP)
Signature Capture Width
Signature Capture Height
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
Video Mode Format Selector
Video View Finder
Target Video Frame Size
Video View Finder Image Size
Video Subsampling
916
324
328
329
667
314
366
367
421
Default
F0h 3Ah 8 BPP
F4h F0h 6Eh 400
F4h F0h 6Fh 100
F0h A5h 65
F2h 94h
F0h 44h
F0h 48h
F0h 49h
F1h 9Bh
JPEG
Disable
2200 bytes
1700 bytes
1/4 Resolution
0 top
0 left
799 bottom
1279 right
Full
180
Quality
65
160 kB
Low (1)
JPEG
0
8 BPP
Disable
JPEG
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
99
Imager Preferences
Image Capture Preferences
The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics.
Operational Modes
The imager has three modes of operation:
• Decode Mode
• Snapshot Mode
• Video Mode
Decode Mode
By default, when you press the trigger the imager attempts to locate and decode enabled barcodes within its field of view. The imager remains in this mode until it decodes a barcode or you release the trigger.
Snapshot Mode
Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. Scan the Snapshot Mode barcode to temporarily enter this mode. While in this mode the imager blinks the green LED at one-second intervals to indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode.
In Snapshot Mode, the imager turns on its aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image. The next trigger press instructs the imager to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass
(less than two seconds) between when the trigger is pressed and the image is captured as the imager adjusts to lighting conditions. Hold the imager steady until a single beep indicates that it captured the image.
If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the imager returns to Decode Mode. Use
To disable the aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see
Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 106
.
Snapshot Mode
Video Mode
In this mode the imager behaves as a video camera as long as you press the trigger. Release the trigger to return to Decode Mode. Scan this barcode to temporarily enter Video Capture Mode.
Video Mode
100
Imager Preferences
Image Capture Illumination
Parameter # 361
SSI # F0h 69h
Scan Enable Image Capture Illumination to turn on illumination during every image capture. This usually results in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
Scan Disable Image Capture Illumination to prevent the imager from using illumination.
*
Enable Image Capture Illumination
(1)
Disable Image Capture Illumination
(0)
Image Capture Autoexposure
Parameter # 360
SSI # F0h 68h
Scan Enable Image Capture Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure
(integration) time to best capture an image for the selected operation mode.
Scan Disable Image Capture Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see the following pages). This option is only recommended for advanced users with difficult image capture situations.
*
Enable Image Capture Autoexposure
(1)
Disable Image Capture Autoexposure
(0)
101
Imager Preferences
Fixed Exposure
Parameter # 567
SSI # F4h F1h 37h
Type: Word
Range: 5 to 30,000
This parameter configures the exposure used in manual mode for Snapshot mode.
Each integer value represents 100 s of exposure. The default value is 100 which results in an exposure setting of
10 ms.
To set the exposure, scan the Fixed Exposure barcode, and then scan four numeric barcodes from
representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set a Fixed Exposure value of 99, scan 0, 0, 9, 9.
Fixed Exposure
(4 digits)
102
Imager Preferences
Analog and Digital Gain
If you disable
you can modify the engine’s analog and digital gain using these parameters. Total gain = analog gain x digital gain.
Analog Gain
Parameter # 1232
SSI # F4h D0h
Select an option to set an analog gain value.
Analog Gain x 1
(00h)
*Analog Gain x 2
(01h)
Analog Gain x 4
(02h)
Analog Gain x 8
(03h)
Digital Gain
Parameter # 1233
SSI # F4h D1h
2-digit value for the digital gain. The default is 32.
A value of 32 = x 1 digital gain; i.e., digital gain = 1/32 x digital gain parameter value.
Digital Gain
103
Imager Preferences
Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode
Parameter # 562
SSI # F1h 32h
This parameter alters the imager’s gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode while in autoexposure mode. Scan one of the following barcodes:
• Low Exposure Priority - The imager favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image, resulting in an image that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts. However, for most applications, the amount of noise is acceptable.
• Low Gain Priority - The imager favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image, ensuring the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image enhancement (sharpening). This mode is recommended for fixed mount / fixed object image capture since the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur.
• Autodetect (default) - The imager automatically selects Gain Priority or Low Exposure Priority mode for
Snapshot Mode. If the imager is in a magnetic reed switch-enabled stand (or it is configured in Blink
Mode), it uses Low Gain Priority. Otherwise, it uses the Low Exposure Priority.
Low Gain Priority
(0)
Low Exposure Priority
(1)
*
Autodetect
(2)
104
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Mode Timeout
Parameter # 323
SSI # F0h 43h
This parameter sets the amount of time the imager remains in Snapshot Mode. The imager exits Snapshot Mode when you press the trigger, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the Set
Snapshot Mode Timeout
barcode, and then scan a barcode from Numeric Barcodes . The default value is 0 which
represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 0 = 30 seconds, 1 = 60 seconds,
2 = 90 seconds, etc. The maximum timeout value that can be set on the scanner is 9 = 300 seconds.
To quickly re-set the default timeout to 30 seconds, scan the 30 Seconds barcode.
If you scan No Timeout , the imager remains in Snapshot Mode until you press the trigger.
Set Snapshot Mode Timeout
*30 Seconds
No Timeout
105
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
Parameter # 300
SSI # F0h 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode.
NOTE : If enabled, the aiming pattern frames the image for aiming purposes and does not appear in the captured image.
*
Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern
(1)
Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern
(0)
Silence Operational Mode Changes
Parameter # 1293
SSI # F8h 05h 0Dh
Scan Silence Operational Mode Changes to silence the speaker when switching between operational modes
(e.g., from Decode Mode to Snapshot Mode).
Silence Operational Mode Changes (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Silence Operational Mode Changes (Disable)
(0)
106
Imager Preferences
Image Cropping
Parameter # 301
SSI # F0h 2Dh
Scan the Enable Image Cropping
barcode to crop a captured image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel
. Scan Disable Image Cropping to present the full 1280 x 800 pixels.
Enable Image Cropping
(1)
*
Disable Image Cropping
(Use Full 1280 x 800 Pixels)
(0)
Crop to Pixel Addresses
Parameter # 315
SSI # F4h F0h 3Bh (Top)
Parameter # 316
SSI # F4h F0h 3Ch (Left)
Parameter # 317
SSI # F4h F0h 3Dh (Bottom)
Parameter # 318
SSI # F4h F0h 3Eh (Right)
NOTE : The imager has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels (after resolution adjustment, see
Image Size (Number of Pixels) on page 109
) transfers the entire image.
If you enabled
Image Cropping , set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (1279 x 799)
to crop to.
Columns are numbered from 0 to 1279, rows from 0 to 799. Specify values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, where
Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses. For example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image, set the following values:
Top = 796, Bottom = 799, Left = 1272, Right = 1279
To set the pixel addresses, scan each of the following barcodes, and then scan four numeric barcodes from
representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to crop the top pixel address to 3, scan 0, 0, 0, 3. The defaults are:
Top = 0, Bottom = 799, Left = 0, Right = 1279
107
Imager Preferences
Crop to Pixel Address (continued)
Top Pixel Address
(0 - 799 Decimal)
Left Pixel Address
(0 - 1279 Decimal)
Bottom Pixel Address
(0 - 799 Decimal)
Right Pixel Address
(0 - 1279 Decimal)
108
Imager Preferences
Image Size (Number of Pixels)
Parameter # 302
SSI # F0h 2Eh
This option alters image resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in a smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan a barcode below to select an image size.
Table 10 Image Size
Resolution Value
Full
1/2
1/4
Uncropped Image Size
1280 x 800
640 x 400
320 x 200
*
Full Resolution
(0)
1/2 Resolution
(1)
1/4 Resolution
(3)
109
Imager Preferences
Video Subsampling
Parameter # 667
SSI # F1h 9Bh
This option alters video frame resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in smaller video frames containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan a barcode below to select the desired video subsampling.
Table 11 Video Subsampling
Resolution Value
Full
1/2
1/4
Uncropped Image Size
1280 x 800
640 x 400
320 x 200
Full Resolution
(0)
1/2 Resolution
(1)
*
1/4 Resolution
(3)
110
Imager Preferences
Image Brightness (Target White)
Parameter # 390
SSI # F0h 86h
Type: Byte
Range: 1 - 240
This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot mode when using autoexposure. White and black are defined as 240 decimal and 1, respectively. Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of the image to ~180.
Scan the Image Brightness
barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing
the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
*
180
Image Brightness
(3 digits)
JPEG Image Options
Parameter # 299
SSI # F0h 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to optimize JPEG images for either size or quality:
• JPEG Quality Selector - Enter a quality value via the
parameter; the imager then selects the corresponding image size.
• JPEG Size Selector - Enter a size value via the
parameter; the imager then selects the best image quality.
*
JPEG Quality Selector
(1)
JPEG Size Selector
(0)
111
Imager Preferences
JPEG Quality Value
Parameter # 305
SSI # F0h 31h
If you selected JPEG Quality Selector , scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes
corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image quality value of 55, scan 0, 5, 5.
JPEG Quality Value
(Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
JPEG Size Value
Parameter # 561
SSI # F1h 31h
Type: Word
Range: 5-350
If you selected JPEG Size Selector , scan the JPEG Size Value barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes
representing the target JPEG file size in kilobytes (KB). Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image file size value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
CAUTION : JPEG compression may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target
image. Scanning JPEG Quality Selector (default setting) on page 111
produces a compressed image that is consistent in quality and compression time.
JPEG Size Value
(Default: 160)
(3 digits)
112
Imager Preferences
Image Enhancement
Parameter # 564
SSI # F1h 34h
This parameter uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is visually pleasing.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the level of image enhancement:
• Off (0)
• Low (1) - Default
• Medium (2)
• High (3)
Off
(0)
*
Low
(1)
Medium
(2)
High
(3)
113
Imager Preferences
Image File Format Selector
Parameter # 304
SSI # F0h 30h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG).
The imager stores captured images in the selected format.
BMP File Format
(3)
*
JPEG File Format
(1)
TIFF File Format
(04h)
114
Imager Preferences
Image Rotation
Parameter # 665
SSI # F1h 99h
Scan one of the following barcodes to rotate the image 0, 90,180, or 270 degrees.
*
Rotate 0 o
(0)
Rotate 90 o
(1)
Rotate 180 o
(2)
Rotate 270 o
(3)
115
Imager Preferences
Bits Per Pixel
Parameter # 303
SSI # F0h 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image:
• 1 BPP - For a black and white image.
• 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.
• 8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE : The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP .
TIFF file formats only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP . Selecting 1 BPP for TIFF applies the 4 BPP option.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*
8 BPP
(2)
116
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture
Parameter # 93
SSI # 5Dh
A signature capture barcode is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index to various signatures. The region inside the barcode pattern is considered the signature capture area. See
Signature Capture for more information.
Output File Format
Decoding a signature capture barcode de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or
TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.
Table 12 Output File Format
File Descriptor
Output Format
(1 byte)
JPEG - 1
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
Signature Type (1 byte)
1-8
Signature Image Size
(4 bytes)
(BIG Endian)
0x00000400
Signature Image
0x00010203….
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Signature Capture.
Enable Signature Capture
(1)
*
Disable Signature Capture
(0)
117
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture File Format Selector
Parameter # 313
SSI # F0h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or
JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.
BMP Signature Format
(3)
*
JPEG Signature Format
(1)
TIFF Signature Format
(4)
118
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel
Parameter # 314
SSI # F0h 3Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a signature:
• 1 BPP - For a black and white image.
• 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.
• 8 BPP - Assigns 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE : The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP .
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*
8 BPP
(2)
119
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Width
Parameter # 366
SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to height.
To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 1280 decimal.
Signature Capture Width (Default: 400)
(16 - 1280 Decimal)
Signature Capture Height
Parameter # 367
SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height barcode, and then scan three barcodes from
corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 960 decimal.
Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)
(16 - 960 Decimal)
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
Parameter # 421
SSI # F0h A5h
Scan the JPEG Quality Value
barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a
value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
120
Imager Preferences
Video Mode Format Selector
Parameter # 916
SSI # F2h 94h
When the digital imager scanner is in Video Mode, select whether to send data in BMP or JPEG format.
BMP File Format
(3)
*
JPEG File Format
(1)
Video View Finder
Parameter # 324
SSI # F0h 44h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to project the video view finder while in Snapshot Mode.
Enable Video View Finder
(1)
*
Disable Video View Finder
(0)
121
Imager Preferences
Target Video Frame Size
Parameter # 328
SSI # F0h 48h
Select the number of 100-byte blocks to transmit per second. Selecting a smaller value transmits more frames per second but reduces video quality; selecting a larger value increases video quality but slows transmission.
To set the Target Video Frame Size, scan the barcode below followed by three barcodes from
corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 20,000 bytes. For example, to select 1500 bytes, enter 0, 1, 5. To select 900 bytes, enter 0, 0, 9. The default is 2200 bytes.
Target Video Frame Size
Video View Finder Image Size
Parameter # 329
SSI # F0h 49h
This parameter sets the number of 100-byte blocks. Values range from 800 to 12,000 bytes. A smaller value transmits more frames per second, while a larger value increases video quality.
Scan the Video View Finder Image Size
barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
corresponding to the 100-byte value from 800 to 12,000 bytes. For example, to select 1500 bytes, enter 0, 1, 5. To select 900 bytes, enter 0, 0, 9. The default is 1700 bytes.
Video View Finder Image Size
122
Symbologies
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 13 on page 124
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see menus, asterisks (
*
) indicate default values.
Default Parameters on page 59 . Throughout the programming barcode
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
Feature/option
123
Symbologies
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit barcode data without the
UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
barcode under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on page 142
. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Symbology Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall the default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
SSI Number 2 Default
Enable/Disable All Code Types
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
UPC-E
UPC-E1
EAN-8/JAN 8
EAN-13/JAN 13
Bookland EAN
Bookland ISBN Format
ISSN EAN
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
1
2
12
4
3
83
576
617
16
01h
02h
0Ch
04h
03h
53h
F1h 40h
F1h 69h
10h
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
ISBN-10
Disable
Ignore
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
124
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
Supplemental 2:
579
580
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
AIM ID
672
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
UPC-A Preamble
UPC-E Preamble
UPC-E1 Preamble
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Coupon Report
40
41
42
34
35
36
37
38
39
85
730
SSI Number
F1h 43h
F1h 44h
50h
F1h A0h
2
000
10
Default
Combined
Page
Number
28h
29h
2Ah
22h
Enable
Enable
Enable
System Character
23h
24h
25h
26h
27h
55h
F1h DAh
System Character
System Character
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
New Coupon
Format
F8h 05h 09h Disable
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
Code 128
Code 128
Set Length(s) for Code 128
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
ISBT 128
ISBT Concatenation
1289
8
209, 210
14
84
577
08h
D1h, D2h
0Eh
54h
F1h 41h
Enable
Any Length
Enable
Enable
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Check ISBT Table
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
578
223
F1h 42h
DFh
Enable
10
Code 128 <FNC4> 1254 F8h 04h E6h Honor
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
125
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Code 128 Security Level 751
1208 Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
Code 39
Code 39
Trioptic Code 39
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
0
13
86
Code 32 Prefix
Set Length(s) for Code 39
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
231
18, 19
48
43
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Code 39 Security Level
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
Code 93
Code 93
Set Length(s) for Code 93
17
750
1209
9
26, 27
Code 11
Code 11
Set Lengths for Code 11
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13
Febraban
10
28, 29
52
47
6
22, 23
49
44
82
1750
SSI Number
F1h EFh
F8h 04h B8h
00h
0Dh
56h
E7h
12h, 13h
30h
2Bh
11h
F1h EEh
Disable
1 to 55
Disable
Disable
Disable
Security Level 1
F8h 04h B9h Disable
09h
1Ah, 1Bh
0Ah
1Ch, 1Dh
34h
2Fh
2
Security Level 1
Disable
Enable
Default
Disable
Disable
Enable
1 to 55
Disable
4 to 55
Disable
Disable
06h
16h, 17h
31h
2Ch
Enable
6 to 55
Disable
Disable
52h Disable
F8h 06h D6h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
126
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121
1210 I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
5
20, 21
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
Set Lengths for Codabar
CLSI Editing
7
24, 25
54
55 NOTIS Editing
Codabar Security Level
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/
Stop Characters Detection
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
1776
855
1784
704 Transmit Codabar Check Digit
MSI
MSI
Set Length(s) for MSI
MSI Check Digits
11
30, 31
50
SSI Number
F8h 04h 61h
F8h 04h BAh
05h
14h 15h
07h
18h, 19h
36h
37h
Enable
4 to 55
Disable
Disable
F8h 06h F0h Security Level 1
F2h 57h Upper Case
F8h 06h F8h
F1h C0h
2 Default
Security Level 1
Disable
Disable
1 to 55
Disable
Disable
0Bh
1Eh, 1Fh
32h
Disable
4 to 55
One MSI Check
Digit
Transmit MSI Check Digit
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
46
51
1392
2Eh
33h
Disable
Mod 10/Mod 10
F8h 05h 70h Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
618
619
620
622
F1h 6Ah
F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch
F1h 6Eh
Disable
4 to 55
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
127
Page
Number
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D
581
586
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly
GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar
Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar
Expanded Stacked
338
339
340
SSI Number
F1h 6Fh
F1h 45h
F1h 4Ah
F0h 52h
F0h 53h
F0h 54h
2
Enable
Enable
Default
Disable
Disable
Regular
Enable
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
GS1 DataBar Security Level
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
Security Level
1D Quiet Zone Level
Intercharacter Gap Size
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C
397
1706
728
78
77
1288
381
F0h 8Dh
F8h 06h AAh
F1h D8h
4Eh
4Dh
F8h 05h 08h
F0h 7Dh
Disable
Level 1
Level 3
1
1
1
Normal
Composite CC-A/B
341
342
F0h 55h
F0h 56h
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Composite TLC-39
Composite Inverse
371
1113
F0h 73h
F8h 04h 59h
Disable
Regular Only
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
128
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
UPC Composite Mode
Composite Beep Mode
Parameter
Number 1
344
398
SSI Number
F0h 58h
F0h 8Eh
2 Default
Page
Number
UPC Never Linked
Beep As Each
Code Type is
Decoded
Disable
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN
Composite Codes
2D Symbologies
PDF417
MicroPDF417
Code 128 Emulation
Data Matrix
GS1 Data Matrix
Data Matrix Inverse
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
Maxicode
QR Code
Weblink QR
GS1 QR
MicroQR
Linked QR Mode
Aztec
Aztec Inverse
Han Xin
Han Xin Inverse
Grid Matrix
Grid Matrix Inverse
Grid Matrix Mirror
DotCode
DotCode Inverse
DotCode Mirrored
427
15
227
123
292
1336
588
537
294
293
1947
1343
573
1847
574
589
1167
1168
1718
1719
1736
1906
1907
1908
F0h ABh
0Fh
E3h
7Bh
F0h 24h
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
F8h 05h 38h Disable
F1h 4Ch Inverse Autodetect
F1h 19h
F0h 26h
F0h 25h
Auto
Disable
Enable
F7 07 9B
F8h 05h 3Fh
F1h 3Dh
737h
Enable
Enable
Enable
Linked QR Only
F1h 3Eh
F1h 4Dh
Enable
Inverse Autodetect
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
F8h 04h 90h Regular
F8h 06h B6h Disable
F8h 06h B7h Regular Only
F8h 06h C8h Regular Only
F8 07 72h Disable
F8 07 73h
F8 07 74h
Autodetect
Autodetect
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
129
Symbologies
Table 13 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
DotCode Prioritize
Parameter
Number 1
1937
SSI Number
F8 07 91h
2
Enable
Default
DotCode Erasure Limit
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Postal Codes
US Postnet
US Planet
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
UK Postal
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Japan Postal
Australia Post
Australia Post Format
Netherlands KIX Code
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
UPU FICS Postal
Mailmark
2063
N/A
N/A
96
290
291
718
326
592
89
90
95
91
611
1337
F8 08 0F
N/A
N/A
59h
5Ah
5Fh
5Bh
60h
F0h 22h
F0h 23h
F1h CEh
F0h 46h
F1h 50h
10
N/A
N/A
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Autodiscriminate
Disable
Disable
F1h 63h Disable
F8h 05h 39h Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
130
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types
Scan the Disable All Code Types barcode to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few code types.
Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code types.
Disable All Code Types
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
Parameter # 1
SSI # 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-A .
Enable All Code Types
*
Enable UPC-A
(1)
Disable UPC-A
(0)
131
Symbologies
UPC-E
Parameter # 2
SSI # 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E .
*
Enable UPC-E
(1)
Disable UPC-E
(0)
UPC-E1
Parameter # 12
SSI # 0Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E1.
NOTE : UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1
(1)
*
Disable UPC-E1
(0)
132
Symbologies
EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 4
SSI # 04h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8 .
*
Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(0)
EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 3
SSI # 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13 .
*
Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(0)
133
Symbologies
Bookland EAN
Parameter # 83
SSI # 53h
NOTE :
If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format
Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only,
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.
Enable Bookland EAN
(1)
*
Disable Bookland EAN
(0)
134
Symbologies
Bookland ISBN Format
Parameter # 576
SSI # F1h 40h
NOTE : For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using
and then set
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with
Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979
Supplemental Mode.
If you enabled Bookland EAN using
Bookland EAN on page 134 , select one of the following formats for Bookland
data:
• Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
• Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
*
Bookland ISBN-10
(0)
Bookland ISBN-13
(1)
135
Symbologies
ISSN EAN
Parameter # 617
SSI # F1h 69h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.
Enable ISSN EAN
(1)
*
Disable ISSN EAN
(0)
136
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
Parameter # 16
SSI # 10h
Supplementals are barcodes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN
13+2). The following options are available:
• Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
• Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
• Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must decode the barcode the number of times set via
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140
before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 barcodes starting with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner
must decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140
before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes that do not have that prefix immediately.
• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
NOTE : If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN barcodes, see
to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using
.
• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any prefix listed previously.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with a 3-digit user-defined prefix. Set this using
User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140
.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with either of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using
User-Programmable Supplementals on page
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140 .
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
137
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
NOTE : To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental characters.
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only
(1)
*
Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals
(0)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals
(2)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode
(4)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
(5)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode
(7)
138
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
(6)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
(8)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode
(3)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1
(9)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2
(10)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2
(12)
139
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1
(11)
Symbologies
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579
SSI # F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580
SSI # F1h 44h
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
to set the
3-digit prefix . To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2 , and then scan three barcodes from
The default is 000 (zeroes).
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
Parameter # 80
SSI # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals, this option adjusts the number of times to decode a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10.
Scan the barcode below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric barcodes in Numeric
. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
140
Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format
Parameter # 672
SSI # F1h A0h
If
Transmit Code ID Character on page 86
is set to AIM Code ID Character , scan one of the following barcodes to select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes with supplementals:
• Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
• Combined – Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.,
]E3<data+supplemental data>
• Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate transmissions, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>
]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
Separate
(0)
*
Combined
(1)
Separate Transmissions
(2)
141
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
Parameter # 40
SSI # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
(0)
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Parameter # 41
SSI # 29h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
(0)
142
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
Parameter # 42
SSI # 2Ah
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the integrity of the data.
*
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
(0)
143
Symbologies
UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 34
SSI # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:
• Transmit System Character only
• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
• Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*
System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
144
Symbologies
UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 35
SSI # 23h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:
• Transmit System Character only
• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
• Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*
System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
145
Symbologies
UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 36
SSI # 24h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:
• Transmit System Character only
• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
• Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
*System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code
(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
146
Symbologies
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Parameter # 37
SSI # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).
Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
Parameter # 38
SSI # 26h
Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections
(e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)
(1)
147
*
Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)
(0)
Symbologies
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
Parameter # 39
SSI # 27h
Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(1)
*
Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend
(0)
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Parameter # 85
SSI # 55h
Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A barcodes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 barcodes starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to use this feature.
NOTE : See
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140
to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(1)
148
*
Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code
(0)
Symbologies
Coupon Report
Parameter # 730
SSI # F1h DAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the type of coupon format to support.
• Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128.
• New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar.
• Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.
Old Coupon Format
(0)
*
New Coupon Format
(1)
Autodiscriminate Coupon Format
(2)
149
Symbologies
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1289
SSI # F8h 05h 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding UPC barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable
, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 203
.
Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*
Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 128
Parameter # 8
SSI # 08h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128.
*
Enable Code 128
(1)
Disable Code 128
(0)
150
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128
L1 = Parameter # 209
SSI # D1h
L2 = Parameter # 210
SSI # D2h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default Any Length .
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 .
To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
151
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 128 - Length Within Range
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)
Parameter # 14
SSI # 0Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1-128.
*
Code 128 - Any Length
*
Enable GS1-128
(1)
Disable GS1-128
(0)
152
Symbologies
ISBT 128
Parameter # 84
SSI # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISBT 128.
*
Enable ISBT 128
(1)
Disable ISBT 128
(0)
ISBT Concatenation
Parameter # 577
SSI # F1h 41h
NOTE : The default for SR/DL models of the scanner is Disable ISBT Concatenation .
The default for HD/HL models of the scanner is Enable ISBT Concatenation .
When enabling ISBT Concatenation or Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation set Code 128 security level to Level 2.
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
• Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols. This is the default for HD/HL models.
• Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it encounters. This is the default for SR/DL models.
• Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of
times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 155 before transmitting its data to confirm that
there is no additional ISBT symbol.
NOTE : For Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation to operate as expected when two barcodes are present, both ISBT barcodes must be in the field of view at the same time. This may be difficult to achieve in presentation mode.
153
ISBT Concatenation (continued)
Symbologies
*
Enable ISBT Concatenation
(1)
(Default - HD/HL Models)
*
Disable ISBT Concatenation
(0)
(Default - SR/DL Models)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation
(2)
Check ISBT Table
Parameter # 578
SSI # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT barcodes that are commonly used in pairs.
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable , enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
*
Enable Check ISBT Table
(1)
Disable Check ISBT Table
(0)
154
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Parameter # 223
SSI # DFh
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the scanner must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan barcodes in
to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan
The default is 10.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Code 128 <FNC4>
Parameter # 1254
SSI # F8h 04h E6h
This feature applies to Code 128 barcodes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128
<FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.
*
Honor Code 128 <FNC4>
(0)
Ignore Code 128 <FNC4>
(1)
155
Symbologies
Code 128 Security Level
Parameter # 751
SSI # F1h EFh
Code 128 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length . The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
• Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness. This is the default.
• Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level
1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 , and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE : Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Code 128 Security Level 0
(0)
*
Code 128 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 128 Security Level 2
(2)
Code 128 Security Level 3
(3)
156
Symbologies
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1208
SSI # F8h 04h B8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 barcodes with reduced quiet zones
(the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable
, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 203
.
Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*
Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 39
Parameter # 0
SSI # 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39.
*
Enable Code 39
(1)
Disable Code 39
(0)
157
Symbologies
Trioptic Code 39
Parameter # 13
SSI # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable
Trioptic Code 39.
NOTE : You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
(1)
*
Disable Trioptic Code 39
(0)
Convert Code 39 to Code 32
Parameter # 86
SSI # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
NOTE : Code 39 (on page
) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(1)
158
*
Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(0)
Symbologies
Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # 231
SSI # E7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 barcodes.
NOTE :
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (on page 158 ) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix
(1)
*
Disable Code 32 Prefix
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 39
L1 = Parameter # 18
SSI # 12h
L2 = Parameter # 19
SSI # 13h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
159
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 39 (continued)
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 39 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only Code 39 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 .
To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode Code 39 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode Code 39 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode Code 39 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
Code 39 - One Discrete Length
Code 39 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Any Length
160
Symbologies
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 48
SSI # 30h
Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded.
Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit
(1)
*
Disable Code 39 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Parameter # 43
SSI # 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
NOTE :
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)
(1)
161
*
Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
Symbologies
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Parameter # 17
SSI # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.
NOTE : You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII
character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table 30 on page 451 .
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII
(1)
*
Disable Code 39 Full ASCII
(0)
162
Symbologies
Code 39 Security Level
Parameter # 750
SSI # F1h EEh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
• Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 , and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE : Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Code 39 Security Level 0
(0)
*
Code 39 Security Level 1
(1)
Code 39 Security Level 2
(2)
163
Code 39 Security Level 3
(3)
Symbologies
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1209
SSI # F8h 04h B9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable
, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 203
.
Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*
Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Code 93
Parameter # 9
SSI # 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 93.
*
Enable Code 93
(1)
Disable Code 93
(0)
164
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93
L1 = Parameter # 26
SSI # 1Ah
L2 = Parameter # 27
SSI # 1Bh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 93 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 93 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 93 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only Code 93 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 .
To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode Code 93 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode Code 93 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 93 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode Code 93 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
165
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 93 (continued)
Code 93 - One Discrete Length
Code 93 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 93 - Length Within Range
Code 93 - Any Length
166
Symbologies
Code 11
Parameter # 10
SSI # 0Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 11
Enable Code 11
(1)
*
Disable Code 11
(0)
Set Lengths for Code 11
L1 = Parameter # 28
SSI # 1Ch
L2 = Parameter # 29
SSI # 1Dh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Code 11 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols with 14 characters, scan Code 11 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 11 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only Code 11 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 .
To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode Code 11 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode Code 11 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Code 11 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode Code 11 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
167
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 11 (continued)
Code 11 - One Discrete Length
Code 11 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Code 11 - Length Within Range
Code 11 - Any Length
168
Symbologies
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 52
SSI # 34h
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm.
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to disable this feature.
*
Disable
(0)
One Check Digit
(1)
Two Check Digits
(2)
169
Symbologies
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits
Parameter # 47
SSI # 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
NOTE :
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Parameter # 6
SSI # 06h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5.
*
Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(1)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(0)
170
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 22
SSI # 16h
L2 = Parameter # 23
SSI # 17h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 80. The default is Length Within Range: 6 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
NOTE : Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications, or
increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 175
.
171
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 49
SSI # 31h
Scan one of the following barcodes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check digit algorithm.
*
Disable
(0)
USS Check Digit
(1)
OPCC Check Digit
(2)
172
Symbologies
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 44
SSI # 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)
(0)
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 82
SSI # 52h
Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)
(0)
173
Symbologies
Febraban
Parameter # 1750
SSI # F8h 06h D6h
Febraban is an I 2 of 5 barcode of length 44 that requires special check characters to be inserted in the transmitted data stream. When enabled, the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission is disabled. When disabled, all I 2 of 5 functionality works as usual.
Recommendations for Length Setting
I 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
I 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
Enable Febraban
(1)
*
Disable Febraban
(0)
174
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Security Level
Parameter # 1121
SSI # F8h 04h 61h
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length .
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A barcode must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 , and misdecodes still occur, select this security level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A barcode must be successfully read three times before being decoded.
NOTE : Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0
(0)
*
I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 2
(2)
I 2 of 5 Security Level 3
(3)
175
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1210
SSI # F8h 04h BAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable
, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 203
.
Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
*
Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Parameter # 5
SSI # 05h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(1)
*
Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(0)
176
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 20
SSI # 14h
L2 = Parameter # 21
SSI # 15h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
177
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
NOTE : Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
178
Symbologies
Codabar (NW - 7)
Parameter # 7
SSI # 07h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Codabar.
*
Enable Codabar
(1)
Disable Codabar
(0)
Set Lengths for Codabar
L1 = Parameter # 24
SSI # 18h
L2 = Parameter # 25
SSI # 19h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14 characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes.
For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
179
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
*Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Any Length
180
Symbologies
CLSI Editing
Parameter # 54
SSI # 36h
Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
NOTE : Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing
(1)
*
Disable CLSI Editing
(0)
NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 55
SSI # 37h
Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
Enable NOTIS Editing
(1)
*
Disable NOTIS Editing
(0)
181
Symbologies
Codabar Security Level
Parameter # 1776
SSI # F8h 06h F0h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Codabar barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
• Codabar Security Level 0: This setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Codabar Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Codabar Security Level 2: Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security
Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Codabar Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2 , and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE : Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Codabar Security Level 0
(0)
*
Codabar Security Level 1
(1)
Codabar Security Level 2
(2)
Codabar Security Level 3
(3)
182
Symbologies
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters
Parameter # 855
SSI # F2h 57h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop characters.
Lower Case
(1)
*
Upper Case
(0)
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
Parameter # 1784
SSI # F8h 06h F8h
Enable this feature to check the Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit to verify that the data complies with the specified check digit algorithm.
Enable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
(1)
*
Disable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
(0)
183
Symbologies
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
Parameter # 704
SSI # F1h C0h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Codabar check digit(s).
NOTE :
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification
must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Codabar Check Digit Transmission
(1)
*
Disable Codabar Check Digit Transmission
(0)
MSI
Parameter # 11
SSI # 0Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MSI.
Enable MSI
(1)
*
Disable MSI
(0)
184
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI
L1 = Parameter # 30
SSI # 1Eh
L2 = Parameter # 31
SSI # 1Fh
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan
MSI -
One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 , 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the barcodes in
For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
185
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
NOTE : Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this, select specific lengths ( MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths ) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
*MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Any Length
186
Symbologies
MSI Check Digits
Parameter # 50
SSI # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits barcode to enable verification of the second check digit.
• 0 - Does not check the MSI check digit; decodes MSI with no check digit.
• 1 - This is for MSI barcodes with one check digit. This is the default.
• 2 - This is for MSI barcodes with two check digits.
See
MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 188
to select second digit algorithms.
No MSI Check Digit
(0)
*
One MSI Check Digit
(1)
Two MSI Check Digits
(2)
187
Symbologies
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)
Parameter # 46
SSI # 2Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)
(1)
*
Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)
(0)
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
Parameter # 51
SSI # 33h
Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
MOD 11/MOD 10
(0)
*
MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
188
Symbologies
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
Parameter # 1392
SSI # F8h 05h 70h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding MSI barcodes with reduced quiet zones. If you select Enable , select a
1D Quiet Zone Level on page 203 .
*
Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(0)
Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
(1)
Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408
SSI # F0h 98h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(1)
*
Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)
189
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618
SSI # F1h 6Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(1)
*
Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5
L1 = Parameter # 619
SSI # F1h 6Bh
L2 = Parameter # 620
SSI # F1h 6Ch
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s) the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
NOTE : When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the barcodes in
. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length , and then scan 1, 4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes . For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths , and then scan 0 , 2 , 1 ,
4 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the barcodes in
For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range , and then scan 0 , 4 , 1, 2 . To correct an error or change the selection, scan
.
• Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
190
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)
Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
*Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
191
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 622
SSI # F1h 6Eh
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the barcode data.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(1)
*
Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
Parameter # 623
SSI # F1h 6Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(1)
*
Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
(0)
192
Symbologies
Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581
SSI # F1h 45h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5.
NOTE : The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.
Enable Korean 3 of 5
(1)
*
Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
Inverse 1D
Parameter # 586
SSI # F1h 4Ah
NOTE : The Inverse 1D setting may impact Composite or Inverse Composite decoding. See
Composite Inverse on page 206 .
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D barcodes.
193
Inverse 1D (continued)
*
Regular
(0)
Symbologies
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
194
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked,
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked and DataBar
Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate barcodes to enable or disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar
Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
Parameter # 338
SSI # F0h 52h
NOTE : When GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional is enabled the variants are also enabled.
*
Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(0)
195
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited
Parameter # 339
SSI # F0h 53h
*
Enable GS1 DataBar Limited
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited
(0)
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
Parameter # 340
SSI # F0h 54h
NOTE : When GS1 DataBar Expanded is enabled GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked is also enabled.
*
Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded
(0)
196
Symbologies
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
Parameter # 397
SSI # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from
DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the barcode as
EAN-13.
For barcodes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the barcode as
UPC-A. The
UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted
barcodes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(1)
*
Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN
(0)
197
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Security Level
Parameter # 1706
SSI # F8h 06h AAh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar
Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) barcodes.
• Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Security Level 1 - This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
• Security Level 2 - Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
GS1 DataBar Security Level 0
(0)
*
GS1 DataBar Security Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 2
(2)
GS1 DataBar Security Level 3
(3)
198
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check
Parameter # 728
SSI # F1h D8h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between the level of margin check and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of margin check necessary.
• Margin Check Level 1 – No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet can result in erroneous decoding of a DataBar Limited barcode when scanning some UPC symbols that start with digits 9 and 7 .
• Margin Check Level 2 – Automatic risk detection. This level of margin check can result in erroneous decoding of DataBar Limited barcodes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the scanner operates in Level 3 or Level 1.
• Margin Check Level 3 – Margin check level reflects the newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a five times trailing clear margin.
• Margin Check Level 4 – Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of margin check requires a five times leading and trailing clear margin.
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1
(1)
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 2
(2)
*
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3
(3)
199
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 4
(4)
Symbologies
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
Parameter # 78
SSI # 4Eh
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the barcode quality:
• Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding.
• Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding, but must read the following codes three times:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.
200
Redundancy Level (continued)
Symbologies
*
Redundancy Level 1
(1)
Redundancy Level 2
(2)
Redundancy Level 3
(3)
Redundancy Level 4
(4)
201
Symbologies
Security Level
Parameter # 77
SSI # 4Dh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta barcodes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of barcode quality. There is an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security necessary for the application.
• Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
NOTE : Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes, and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to improve the quality of the barcodes.
Security Level 0
(0)
*
Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 2
(2)
Security Level 3
(3)
202
Symbologies
1D Quiet Zone Level
Parameter # 1288
SSI # F8h 05h 08h
This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding barcodes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on either side of a barcode), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other symbologies. Options are:
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of barcode for decoding.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of barcode.
1D Quiet Zone Level 0
(0)
*
1D Quiet Zone Level 1
(1)
1D Quiet Zone Level 2
(2)
1D Quiet Zone Level 3
(3)
203
Symbologies
Intercharacter Gap Size
Parameter # 381
SSI # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is typically quite small. Due to various barcode printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner from decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these out-of-specification barcodes.
*
Normal Intercharacter Gaps
(6)
Large Intercharacter Gaps
(10)
Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # 341
SSI # F0h 55h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-C.
NOTE : The default value is based on model type: The default for SR/DL models is disable; The default for HD/HL models is enable.
*
Enable CC-C
(1)
(Default - HD/HL Models)
*
Disable CC-C
(0)
(Default - SR/DL Models)
204
Symbologies
Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # 342
SSI # F0h 56h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-A/B.
NOTE : The default value is based on model type: The default for SR/DL models is disable; The default for HD/HL models is enable.
*
Enable CC-A/B
(1)
(Default - HD/HL Models)
*
Disable CC-A/B
(0)
(Default - SR/DL Models)
Composite TLC-39
Parameter # 371
SSI # F0h 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39
(1)
*
Disable TLC39
(0)
205
Symbologies
Composite Inverse
Parameter # 1113
SSI # F8h 04h 59h
Select an option to set Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode. This mode only supports Composite
Inverse that includes DataBar combined with CCAB, and does not support other 1D/2D combinations.
For this parameter to function, first enable
Composite CC-A/B on page 205 .
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set
Regular Only or Inverse Autodetect .
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set
Inverse Only or Inverse Autodetect.
*
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
206
Symbologies
UPC Composite Mode
Parameter # 344
SSI # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
• UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
• UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the barcode.
• Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the
UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
*
UPC Never Linked
(0)
UPC Always Linked
(1)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites
(2)
207
Symbologies
Composite Beep Mode
Parameter # 398
SSI # F0h, 8Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite barcode.
Single Beep After Both are Decoded
(0)
*
Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded
(1)
Double Beep After Both are Decoded
(2)
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes
Parameter # 427
SSI # F0h, ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable this mode.
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(1)
*
Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(0)
208
Symbologies
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Parameter # 15
SSI # 0Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable PDF417.
*
Enable PDF417
(1)
MicroPDF417
Parameter # 227
SSI # E3h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.
Disable PDF417
(0)
Enable MicroPDF417
(1)
*
Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
209
Symbologies
Code 128 Emulation
Parameter # 123
SSI # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable
Code ID Character (1) on page 86 for this parameter to work.
NOTE : Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites instead.
Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
Enable Code 128 Emulation
(1)
*
Disable Code 128 Emulation
(0)
210
Symbologies
Data Matrix
Parameter # 292
SSI # F0h, 24h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Data Matrix.
*
Enable Data Matrix
(1)
Disable Data Matrix
(0)
GS1 Data Matrix
Parameter # 1336
SSI # F8h 05h 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.
Enable GS1 Data Matrix
(1)
*
Disable GS1 Data Matrix
(0)
211
Symbologies
Data Matrix Inverse
Parameter # 588
SSI # F1h 4Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
*Inverse Autodetect
(2)
212
Symbologies
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images
Parameter # 537
SSI # F1h 19h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix barcodes:
• Never - Do not decode Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
• Always - Decode only Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
• Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix barcodes.
Never
(0)
Always
(1)
*
Auto
(2)
213
Symbologies
Maxicode
Parameter # 294
SSI # F0h, 26h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Maxicode.
Enable Maxicode
(1)
QR Code
Parameter # 293
SSI # F0h, 25h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable QR Code.
NOTE : Inverse QR barcodes decode if QR Code is enabled.
*
Disable Maxicode
(0)
*
Enable QR Code
(1)
Disable QR Code
(0)
214
Symbologies
Weblink QR
Parameter #1947
SSI # F7 07 9B
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Weblink QR barcode.
*Enable Weblink QR Codes
(1)
Disable Weblink QR Codes
(0)
215
Symbologies
GS1 QR
Parameter # 1343
SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 QR.
*
Enable GS1 QR
(1)
MicroQR
Parameter # 573
SSI # F1h 3Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroQR.
Disable GS1 QR
(0)
*
Enable MicroQR
(1)
Disable MicroQR
(0)
216
Symbologies
Linked QR Mode
Parameter # 1847
SSI # 737h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a linked QR mode.
• Linked QR Only - Does not decode individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes.
• Individual QR With Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and keeps the header information and data.
• Individual QR No Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and just transmits data without header information.
*
Linked QR Only
(0)
Individual QR With Headers
(1)
Individual QR No Headers
(2)
217
Symbologies
Aztec
Parameter # 574
SSI # F1h 3Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Aztec.
NOTE : Enabling Aztec also enables Linked Aztec.
*
Enable Aztec
(1)
Disable Aztec
(0)
Aztec Inverse
Parameter # 589
SSI # F1h 4Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
*Inverse Autodetect
(2)
218
Symbologies
Han Xin
Parameter # 1167
SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Han Xin.
Enable Han Xin
(1)
*
Disable Han Xin
(0)
Han Xin Inverse
Parameter # 1168
SSI # F8h 04h 90h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with normal reflectance only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin barcodes.
*Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
219
Symbologies
Grid Matrix
Parameter # 1718
SSI # F8h 06h B6h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Grid Matrix.
Enable
(1)
*
Disable
(0)
Grid Matrix Inverse
Parameter # 1719
SSI # F8h 06h B7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Autodiscriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix barcodes.
*
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
220
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Mirror
Parameter # 1736
SSI # F8h 06h C8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix mirror decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Mirrored Only - The scanner decodes mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Auto-discriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes.
*
Regular Only
(0)
Mirrored Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
221
Symbologies
DotCode
Parameter # 1906
SSI # F8 07 72h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable DotCode.
* Disable DotCode
(0)
Enable DotCode
(1)
222
Symbologies
DotCode Inverse
Parameter # 1907
SSI # F8 07 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Inverse decoder setting. Setting options are:
• Regular Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with normal reflectance only.
• Inverse Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
• Inverse Autodetect - Decoder decodes both regular and inverse DotCode barcodes.
Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
* Autodetect
(2)
223
Symbologies
DotCode Mirrored
Parameter # 1908
SSI # F8 07 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Mirror decoder setting:
• Non-Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes non-mirrored DotCode barcodes only.
• Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes mirrored DotCode barcodes only.
• Autodetect - Digital scanner decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored DotCode barcodes.
Never
(0)
Always
(1)
* Autodetect
(2)
224
Symbologies
DotCode Prioritize
Parameter # 1937
SSI # F8 07 91h
Enable DotCode Prioritize to give priority to DotCode decoding as compared to other symbologies.
Disable
* Enable
DotCode Erasure Limit
Parameter # 2063
SSI # F8 08 0F
This parameter sets the maximum number of erasures in DotCode codewords before passing the codewords for error correction. The value range is from 4 to 20. The default value is 10.
A bigger value means that DotCode barcodes are easier to decode, but the chance of getting a misdecode is higher.
To set a DotCode Erasure Limit value, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from
an erasure value of 4, scan this barcode, and then scan the
0 and 4 barcodes. To correct an error or change the
DotCode Erasure Limit
225
Symbologies
Macro PDF Features
Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode symbols encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data from up to 50 MacroPDF symbols.
CAUTION : When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix barcodes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When scanning a Macro PDF sequence, scan the entire sequence without interruption. When scanning a mixed sequence, two long low beeps (low / low) indicate an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent symbology error.
Flush Macro Buffer
Scan the following barcode to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Scan the following barcode to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
226
Symbologies
Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 89
SSI # 59h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Postnet.
Enable US Postnet
(1)
US Planet
Parameter # 90
SSI # 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Planet.
*
Disable US Postnet
(0)
Enable US Planet
(1)
*
Disable US Planet
(0)
227
Symbologies
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 95
SSI # 5Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
*
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit
(0)
UK Postal
Parameter # 91
SSI # 5Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UK Postal.
Enable UK Postal
(1)
*
Disable UK Postal
(0)
228
Symbologies
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Parameter # 96
SSI # 60h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
*
Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
(0)
Japan Postal
Parameter # 290
SSI # F0h, 22h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Japan Postal.
Enable Japan Postal
(1)
*
Disable Japan Postal
(0)
229
Symbologies
Australia Post
Parameter # 291
SSI # F0h, 23h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Australia Post.
Enable Australia Post
(1)
*
Disable Australia Post
(0)
230
Symbologies
Australia Post Format
Parameter # 718
SSI # F1h, CEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a format for Australia Post:
• Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding
Tables.
NOTE : This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify the Encoding Table used for encoding.
• Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.
• Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.
• Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical
Specifications available at auspost.com.au
.
*
Autodiscriminate
(0)
Raw Format
(1)
Alphanumeric Encoding
(2)
Numeric Encoding
(3)
231
Symbologies
Netherlands KIX Code
Parameter # 326
SSI # F0h, 46h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.
Enable Netherlands KIX Code
(1)
*
Disable Netherlands KIX Code
(0)
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
Parameter # 592
SSI # F1h 50h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(1)
*
Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
(0)
232
Symbologies
UPU FICS Postal
Parameter # 611
SSI # F1h 63h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.
Enable UPU FICS Postal
(1)
Mailmark
Parameter # 1337
SSI # F8h 05h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Mailmark.
*
Disable UPU FICS Postal
(0)
*Disable Mailmark
(0)
Enable Mailmark
(1)
233
USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host. The scanner connects directly to a USB host, or a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 14 on page 236
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under
USB Keystroke Delay on page 240
. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
234
Connecting a USB Interface
Figure 15 USB Connection
USB Interface
Interface Cable
USB Connector
NOTE : When connecting via USB use the shielded connector cable (e.g., p/n CBA-U21-S07ZBR). Refer to
Solution Builder for guidance about cables.
If you already have existing non shielded cables from legacy products (such as the DS9808) they can be reused. However, be aware that the shielded cables provide improved ESD performance. For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at: https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Univer sal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx
.
The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including:
• TGCS (IBM) terminals
• Apple ™ desktop and notebooks
• Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:
• Windows ® XP, 7, 8, 10
• MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6
• IBM 4690 OS
• Linux.
The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).
To set up the scanner:
1.
Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31
.
NOTE :
Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 15
are examples only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
235
USB Interface
2.
3.
4.
5.
Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the PowerPlus connector in an available port of the
IBM SurePOS terminal.
The scanner automatically detects the host and uses the default USB device type. If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate barcode from
On first installation when using Windows, the software may prompt to select or install the Human Interface
Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next at all choices and click Finished on the last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 48 .
USB Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 14 USB Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
USB Keystroke Delay
USB Caps Lock Override
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
USB Fast HID
USB Polling Interval
Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB FN1 Substitution
Function Key Mapping
Default Page Number
USB Keyboard HID
Enable
No Delay
Disable
Send Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
Disable
Enable
3 msec
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
236
USB Interface
Table 14 USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Simulated Caps Lock
Convert Case
USB Static CDC
CDC Beep on <BEL>
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Disable
None
Enable
Enable
Honor
Ignore
Ignore
Version 2.2
Default
Page Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB
Keyboard HID
.
NOTES :
• When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.
• When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If you require two connections, select IBM Table-top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-held USB for the second scanner.
• Select IBM Hand-held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command. Aim, illumination, and decoding is still permitted. Select IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-held USB with Full Scan Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable command, including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.
• To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide.
*
USB Keyboard HID
IBM Table-top USB
237
USB Device Type (continued)
USB Interface
IBM Hand-held USB
OPOS
(IBM Hand-held with Full Disable)
NOTES :
•
Before selecting USB CDC Host on page 238
or
SSI over USB CDC on page 238 , install the appropriate
USB CDC Driver on the host to ensure the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to enumerate USB). Go to zebra.com/support , Support & Downloads > Barcode Scanners > USB CDC
Driver, select the appropriate Windows platform, and download the appropriate CDC Driver (64 bit or 32 bit).
To recover a stalled scanner:
Install the USB CDC Driver or
After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the scanner to power up using an alternate
USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type .
• Select USB HID POS to communicate over a USB cable with Universal Windows Platform (UWP) applications running on Windows 10 devices.
USB CDC Host
SSI over USB CDC
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
238
USB Device Type (continued)
USB Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface
USB HID POS
(for Windows 10 devices only)
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking
After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable status handshaking.
*
Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
239
USB Interface
USB Keystroke Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.
*
No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
USB Caps Lock Override
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows
(ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
Override Caps Lock Key
(Enable)
*
Do Not Override Caps Lock Key
(Disable)
240
USB Interface
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending barcodes containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for USB Keyboard HID devices to send the barcode characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
*
Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39
This option applies only to the IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*
Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
241
USB Interface
USB Fast HID
Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit USB HID data at a faster rate.
NOTE : Disable USB Fast HID if there are problems with transmission.
*
Enable USB Fast HID
Disable USB Fast HID
USB Polling Interval
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.
NOTE : When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.
IMPORTANT : Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.
1 msec
2 msec
242
USB Polling Interval (continued)
USB Interface
*
3 msec
4 msec
5 msec
6 msec
7 msec
8 msec
9 msec
243
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad.
For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.
NOTE : If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see
Keypad Emulation below.
*
Enable Keypad Emulation
Disable Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan
Enable Quick
Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
*
Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
244
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT
BREAK”.
*
Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 barcode with a user-selected Key Category and value.
See
FN1 Substitution Values on page 90 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
*
Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
245
USB Interface
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see
Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*
Disable Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.
NOTES : - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.
- Do not enable this parameter if any of the following parameters are enabled:
USB Caps Lock Override on page 240
Convert All to Upper Case on page 247
Convert All to Lower Case on page 247
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
246
*
Disable Simulated Caps Lock
USB Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE : Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
*
No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
USB Static CDC
When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1, second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.)
When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.
*Enable USB Static CDC
Disable USB Static CDC
247
USB Interface
CDC Beep on <BEL>
Parameter #150
SSI # 96h
If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
*
Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>
Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep
Parameter #1360
SSI # F8h 05h 50h
The host can send a direct I/O beep request to the scanner. If you select Ignore Direct I/O Beep , the scanner does not sound beeps on this command. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
*Honor Direct I/O Beep
(1)
Ignore Direct I/O Beep
(0)
248
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
The host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*
Ignore Beep Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive
The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
*
Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
249
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version
Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown:
• Data Matrix
• GS1 Data Matrix
• QR Code
• GS1 QR
• MicroQR Code
• Aztec
Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.
IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)
ASCII Character Sets
See
for the following information:
•
ASCII Character Set, Table 30 on page 451
•
ALT Key Character Set, Table 31 on page 456
• GUI Key Character Set,
•
PF Key Character Set, Table 33 on page 458
•
F Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 459
• Numeric Key Character Set,
•
Extended Key Character Set, Table 36 on page 460
*
IBM Specification Level Version 2.2
250
SSI Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners, two-dimensional scanners, Hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means for the host to control the decoder or scanner.
Communication
All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol.
Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI.
The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper
SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum).
Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a larger message (packeted).
SSI performs the following functions for the host device:
• Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner
• Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner
• Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.
The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a power supply.
SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format of the transmitted data.
The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host.
All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats section.
describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
251
SSI Interface
SSI Commands
lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.
Table 15 SSI Commands
AIM_OFF
AIM_ON
BEEP
Name
CAPABILITIES_REPLY
CAPABILITIES_REQUEST
CMD_ACK
CMD_NAK
DECODE_DATA
EVENT
LED_OFF
LED_ON
PARAM_DEFAULTS
PARAM_REQUEST
PARAM_SEND
REPLY_REVISION
REQUEST_REVISION
SCAN_DISABLE
SCAN_ENABLE
SLEEP
START_DECODE
STOP_DECODE
WAKEUP
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Type Opcode
H 0xC4
D
0xC5
0xE6
0xD4
H
H
D
H
H 0xD3
H/D 0xD0
H/D 0xD1
D 0xF3
0xF6
0xE8
0xE7
0xC8
H 0xC7
H/D 0xC6
D 0xA4
0xA3
0xEA
0xE9
0xEB
0xE4
0xE5
N/A
Deactivate aim pattern.
Description
Activate aim pattern.
Sound the speaker.
Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the capabilities and commands the decoder supports.
Request capabilities report from the decoder.
Positive acknowledgment of received packet.
Negative acknowledgment of received packet.
Decode data in SSI packet format.
Event indicated by associated event code.
De-activate LED output.
Activate LED output.
Set parameter default values.
Request values of certain parameters.
Send parameter values.
Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's software/hardware configuration.
Request the decoder's configuration.
Prevent the operator from scanning barcodes.
Permit barcode scanning.
Request to place the decoder into low power.
Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a barcode.
Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.
Wake the decoder from low power mode.
For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.
252
SSI Interface
SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions
ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since they are not packeted data.
Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:
• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200.
• The scanner cannot interpret the message.
• The scanner does not implement the change the host requested.
• The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly.
• Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:
• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message.
• The scanner cannot interpret the message.
• The scanner CMD_NAKs the message.
• The host resends the message.
• The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter changes.
253
SSI Interface
Decoded Data Transmission
The
parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.
NOTE : When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data
The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.
(1)
DECODE_DATA
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(2)
CMD_ACK message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
ASCII data Host
254
SSI Interface
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA
In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter is disabled.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1)
DECODE_DATA message sent
Host
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data
The decoder sends captured data to the host.
Decoder
Data is captured by decoder
(1)
ASCII data sent
Host
Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s
Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
ACK/NAK Option
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly.
ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.
Number of Data Bits
All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.
255
SSI Interface
Serial Response Timeout
The
parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.
NOTE :
You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process
an ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited write cycles of non-volatile memory.
Retries
The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a
NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte.
The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled).
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.
Errors
The scanner issues a communication error when:
• The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive retries
• The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.
SSI Communication Notes
• When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not communicate with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.
• When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to send two commands within the same handshaking frame.
• There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
256
SSI Interface
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI
specific delay value, use an SSI command according to
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 16 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power
Value Timeout Value Timeout
0x00 15 Min 0x10 1 Sec
Value
0x20
0x01
0x02
30 Min
60 Min
0x11
0x12
1 Sec
2 Sec
0x21
0x22
0x03
N/A
N/A
N/A
90 Min
N/A
N/A
N/A
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
3 Sec
4 Sec
5 Sec
6 Sec
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1A
0x1B
0x1C
0x1D
0x1E
0x1F
7 Sec
8 Sec
9 Sec
10 Sec
15 Sec
20 Sec
30 Sec
45 Sec
60 Sec
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
0x2C
0x2D
0x2E
0x2F
7 Min
8 Min
9 Min
10 Min
15 Min
20 Min
30 Min
45 Min
60 Min
Timeout
1 Min
1 Min
2 Min
3 Min
4 Min
5 Min
6 Min
0x37
0x38
0x39
0x3A
0x3B
0x3C
0x3D
0x3E
0x3F
0x33
0x34
0x35
0x36
Value
0x30
0x31
0x32
7 Hours
8 Hours
9 Hours
10 Hours
15 Hours
20 Hours
30 Hours
45 Hours
60 Hours
Timeout
1 Hour
1 Hour
2 Hours
3 Hours
4 Hours
5 Hours
6 Hours
CAUTION : With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the
10 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 10 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
257
SSI Interface
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI
The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.
Command Structure
Byte 7 6 5 4
Length (not including the checksum)
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
Message Source (4 - Host)
3 2 1 0
2
3
0
1
4
...
Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit
Payload data (see the following example)
Length -1
Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that do not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.
Response Structure
Byte 7 6 5 4
Length (not including the checksum)
SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
Message Source (0 - Decoder)
3 2 1 0
2
3
0
1
4
...
Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit
Payload data (see the following example)
Length -1
Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
258
SSI Interface
Example Transaction
The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting
(Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an
RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the device.
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device
0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E
Where:
• 0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header
• 00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command
• FD 4E is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Packet Size Information
0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C
Where:
• 0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header
• 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response
• FD 6C is SSI response checksum
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information
0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0
Where:
• 0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header
• 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal
• FE B0 is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information
21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15
Where:
• 21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI command header
• 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report value
• FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination
• FC 15 is SSI response checksum
259
SSI Interface
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via barcode menu or SSI hosts commands.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 17 on page 261
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
(1) Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200
barcode under Baud Rate on page 262 . The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
260
SSI Interface
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Download data through the device’s serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying barcodes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for detailed instructions for changing parameters using this method.
NOTE :
SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in ASCII Character Set on page 451
differently than other interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default value of 7013 is interpreted as CR only.
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 17 SSI Interface Default Table
Parameter
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parity
Check Parity
Stop Bits
Software Handshaking
Host RTS Line State
Decode Data Packet Format
Host Serial Response Timeout
Host Character Timeout
Multipacket Option
Interpacket Delay
Event Reporting
Decode Event
Boot Up Event
Parameter Event
Parameter
Number
157
159
154
238
N/A
156
158
151
155
239
334
335
256
258
259
SSI Number
9Dh
9Fh
9Ah
EEh
N/A
9Ch
9Eh
97h
9Bh
EFh
F0h 4Eh
F0h 4Fh
F0h 00h
F0h 02h
F0h 03h
Default
N/A
9600
None
Disable
1
ACK/NAK
Low
Send Raw Decode Data
Low - 2 Seconds
Low - 200 msec
Multipacket Option 1
Minimum - 0 msec
Disable
Disable
Disable
Page
Number
261
SSI Interface
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following barcode.
SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parameter # 156
SSI # 9Ch
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
*Baud Rate 9600
(6)
Baud Rate 19,200
(7)
Baud Rate 38,400
(8)
Baud Rate 57,600
(10)
262
Baud Rate (continued)
Baud Rate 115,200
(11)
SSI Interface
Baud Rate 230,400
(13)
Baud Rate 460,800
(14)
Baud Rate 921,600
(15)
263
SSI Interface
Parity
Parameter # 158
SSI # 9Eh
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
• Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an odd number of 1 bits.
• Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an even number of 1 bits.
• None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
(2)
Even
(1)
*None
(0)
264
SSI Interface
Check Parity
Parameter # 151
SSI # 97h
select the type of parity.
*Do Not Check Parity
(0)
Check Parity
(1)
Stop Bits
Parameter # 157
SSI # 9Dh
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*1 Stop Bit
(1)
2 Stop Bits
(2)
265
SSI Interface
Software Handshaking
Parameter # 159
SSI # 9Fh
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers.
Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it.
Options:
• Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking packets.
• Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout
to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the data and declaring a transmission error.
Disable ACK/NAK
(0)
*Enable ACK/NAK
(1)
266
SSI Interface
Host RTS Line State
Parameter # 154
SSI # 9Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line.
The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host
PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 268
). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High barcode to address this problem.
*Low
(0)
High
(1)
267
SSI Interface
Decode Data Packet Format
Parameter # 238
SSI # EEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with the packet format defined by the serial protocol.
Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.
*Send Raw Decode Data
(0)
Send Packeted Decode Data
(1)
268
SSI Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout
Parameter # 155
SSI # 9Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending.
Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits for the designated timeout before declaring an error.
NOTE : Other values are available via SSI commands.
*Low - 2 Seconds
(20)
Medium - 5 Seconds
(50)
High - 7.5 Seconds
(75)
Maximum - 9.9 Seconds
(99)
269
SSI Interface
Host Character Timeout
Parameter # 239
SSI # EFh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters transmitted by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.
NOTE : Other values are available via SSI commands.
*Low - 200 msec
(20)
Medium - 500 msec
(50)
High - 750 msec
(75)
Maximum - 990 msec
(99)
270
SSI Interface
Multipacket Option
Parameter # 334
SSI # F0h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions:
• Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet transmission.
• Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.
• Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket delay. See
to set this delay.
*Multipacket Option 1
(0)
Multipacket Option 2
(1)
Multipacket Option 3
(2)
271
SSI Interface
Interpacket Delay
Parameter # 335
SSI # F0h 4Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3 .
NOTE : Other values are available via SSI commands.
*
Minimum - 0 msec
(0)
Low - 25 msec
(25)
Medium - 50 msec
(50)
High - 75 msec
(75)
Maximum - 99 msec
(99)
272
SSI Interface
Event Reporting
The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the following barcodes to enable or disable the events listed in
Table 18 and on the following pages.
Table 18 Event Codes
Event Class
Decode Event Non-parameter decode
Boot Up Event
Parameter Event
System power-up
Parameter entry error
Event
Parameter stored
Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default)
Number expected
Code Reported
0x01
0x03
0x07
0x08
0x0A
0x0F
Decode Event
Parameter # 256
SSI # F0h 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Decode Event.
• Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful barcode decode.
• Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Decode Event
(1)
*Disable Decode Event
(0)
273
SSI Interface
Boot Up Event
Parameter # 258
SSI # F0h 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Boot Up Event:
• Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied.
• Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Boot Up Event
(1)
*Disable Boot Up Event
(0)
Parameter Event
Parameter # 259
SSI # F0h 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Parameter Event:
• Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events
specified in Table 18 on page 273 occurs.
• Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Parameter Event
(1)
*Disable Parameter Event
(0)
274
RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The scanner uses the RS-232 interface to connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port) .
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 19 on page 277
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
If your host does not appear in
Table 20 , refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication
parameters to match the host.
NOTE : The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C conversion. Contact support for more information.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
Feature/option
275
RS-232 Interface
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan the Baud Rate 19,200
barcode under Baud Rate on page 282 . The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Connecting an RS-232 Interface
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 16 RS-232 Connection
Interface Cable
Serial Port
Connector to Host
Power Supply
Cable
1.
Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31
.
NOTE : Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in
, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power supply into an appropriate outlet.
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate barcode from
.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 48 .
276
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 19 RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Check Receive Errors
Hardware Handshaking
Software Handshaking
Host Serial Response Timeout
RTS Line State
Beep on <BEL>
Intercharacter Delay
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Default
Standard
9600
None
1 Stop Bit
8-bit
Enable
None
None
2 Seconds
Low RTS
Disable
0 msec
Normal Operation
Send Barcode With Unknown
Characters
Page
Number
277
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host Parameters
Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment
(CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 20
.
Table 20 Terminal Specific RS-232
Parameter ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Yes
Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode
B/OPOS/JPOS
Yes
Olivetti Omron CUTE
Transmit
Code ID
Data
Transmission
Format
Suffix
Baud Rate
Parity
Hardware
Handshaking
Software
Handshaking
Yes
Data/
Suffix
9600
Even
RTS/CTS
Option 3
None
Yes
Data/
Suffix
9600
None
None
None
Data/
Suffix
CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013)
9600
Odd
RTS/CTS
Option 3
None
Data/
Suffix
CR (1013)
9600
Odd
RTS/CTS
Option 3
None
Yes Yes Yes
Prefix/Data/
Suffix
Data/
Suffix
Prefix/
Data/
Suffix
ETX (1002) CR (1013) CR
(1013)
ETX
(1003)
9600
Even
None
ACK/NAK
9600
None
None
None
9600
None
None
None
Serial
Response
Timeout
Stop Bit
Select
9.9 Sec.
One
2 Sec.
One
None
One
None
One
9.9 Sec.
One
9.9 Sec.
One
9.9 Sec.
One
ASCII Format 8-Bit
Beep On
<BEL>
Disable
8-Bit
Disable
8-Bit
Disable
8-Bit
Disable
7-Bit
Disable
8-Bit
Disable
8-Bit
Disable
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 60 , then change the host selection.
278
RS-232 Interface
Table 20 Terminal Specific RS-232 (Continued)
Parameter ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
RTS Line
State
High Low Low
Wincor-
Nixdorf Mode
B/OPOS/JPOS
Low = No data to send
Olivetti
Low
Omron
High
CUTE
High
Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX
(1002)
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 60 , then change the host selection.
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or
CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers transmits the code ID characters listed in
. These code ID characters are not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID feature for these terminals.
Table 21 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters
Code Type ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
UPC-A A A A
UPC-E
EAN-8/JAN-8
EAN-13/JAN-13
Code 39
E
FF
F
C <len>
E
FF
F
None
C
B
A
M
Code 39 Full ASCII None
Codabar N <len>
None
None
Code 128
I 2 of 5
L <len>
I <len>
None
None I
M
N
K
Code 93
D 2 of 5
GS1-128
MSI
Bookland EAN
Trioptic
Code 11
None None
H <len> None
L <len> None
None None
F
None
None
F
None
None
L
H
P
O
A
None
None
279
P
O
L
H
A
None
None
I
K
M
N
C
B
A
M
A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
Olivetti Omron CUTE
A
C
A
E
A
None
B FF None
A F A
M <len> C <len> 3
None None 3
N <len> N <len> None
K <len> L <len> 5
I <len> I <len> 1
L <len> None None
H <len> H <len> 2
P <len> L <len> 5
O <len> None None
A
None
None
F
None
None
None
None
None
RS-232 Interface
Table 21 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)
Code Type ICL Fujitsu
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode B/
OPOS/JPOS
IATA H<len> None H H
Code 32
GS1 DataBar
Variants
None
None
None
None
None
E
None
E
PDF417
Data Matrix
GS1 Data Matrix
QR Codes
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Q
R
W
U
Q
R
W
U
GS1 QR None
Aztec/Aztec Rune None
Maxicode
MicroPDF
None
None
None
None
None
None
T
S
X
V
T
S
X
V
Olivetti
H<len>
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Omron
H<len>
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
CUTE
2
None
None
6
4
None
7
None
8
None
6
RS-232 Host Types
To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following barcodes.
NOTE :
For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
*
Standard RS-232 1
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
280
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
RS-232 Interface
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
CUTE 2
1 Scanning Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits, handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type barcode changes these settings.
2 The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan
*Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 60 , and then change the host selection.
281
RS-232 Interface
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host device or may reach it in distorted form.
Baud Rate 4800
*
Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
Baud Rate 57,600
Baud Rate 115,200
282
RS-232 Interface
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to select the parity type according to host device requirements:
• Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an odd number of 1 bits.
• Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an even number of 1 bits.
• None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
*
None
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
*
1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
283
RS-232 Interface
Data Bits
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
7-bit
*
8-bit
Check Receive Errors
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters.
The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 283
.
*
Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
284
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).
If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
NOTE : The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
Options:
• None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available.
• Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data according to the following sequence: a.
The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:
•
Timeout on page 289 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the
timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
• If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to
for the host to de-assert
CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the scanned data.
b.
c.
The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
• RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
• RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner waits for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the
if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
• RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence: d.
The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS. e.
f.
g.
The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout
for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
285
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking (continued)
*
None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
286
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
Options:
• None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.
• ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout
to receive an ACK or NAK. If the scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There are no reattempts.
• ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive an ENQ within the
, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every
Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent
transmission errors.
• ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.
• XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
• The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to the
for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the
XON within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
• The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner waits indefinitely for the XON.
287
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking (continued)
*
None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
288
RS-232 Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.
*
Minimum: 2 Seconds
Low: 2.5 Seconds
Medium: 5 Seconds
High: 7.5 Seconds
Maximum: 9.9 Seconds
289
RS-232 Interface
RTS Line State
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS .
*
Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep on <BEL>
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
Beep On <BEL> Character
(Enable)
*
Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character
(Disable)
290
RS-232 Interface
Intercharacter Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
*
Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
291
RS-232 Interface
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following barcodes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns on its LED after a decode.
*
Normal Operation
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
*
Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
ASCII Character Sets
See ASCII Character Set,
Table 30 on page 451 , for prefix/suffix values
292
IBM Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 22 on page 295
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan the Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) barcode under
Port Address on page 296 . The scanner issues a
fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
293
IBM Interface
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host
Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 17 IBM Connection
Interface Cable
Host Port Connector
1.
Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31
.
2.
3.
4.
NOTE : Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated in
Figure 17 , but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (typically Port 9).
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate
barcode from Port Address on page 296 to select the port address.
To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
NOTE : The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system typically controls other scanner parameters.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 48 .
294
IBM Interface
IBM Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 22 IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address
Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
Default
None
Disable
Ignore
Ignore
Original Specification
Page
Number
295
IBM Interface
IBM Host Parameters
Port Address
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the IBM 468X/469X port.
NOTE : Scanning a Port Address barcode enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.
NOTE :
For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
*
None
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
296
IBM Interface
Convert Unknown to Code 39
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
*
Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
*
Ignore Beep Directive
297
IBM Interface
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive
The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
*
Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
Parameter # 1729 (SSI # F8h 06h C1h)
The IBM interface specification version selected defines how code types are reported over the IBM interface.
When you scan Original Specification , only Symbologies that were historically supported on each individual port are reported as known. When you scan Version 2.0, all Symbologies covered in the newer IBM specification are reported as known with their respective code types.
*
Original Specification
(0)
Version 2.0
(1)
298
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the scanner. The scanner connects between the keyboard and host computer and translates barcode data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they originated from the keyboard. This mode adds barcode reading functionality to a system designed for manual keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 23 on page 301
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan a barcode in
programming barcode menus, asterisks (
*
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
Feature/option
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under
Keystroke Delay on page 303 . The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
299
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface
Figure 18 Keyboard Wedge Connection
Power supply
(if required)
Male DIN connector
Keyboard connector Male DIN connector
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NOTE : Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.
Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
Ensure that all connections are secure.
Turn on the host system.
The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 302
.
To modify other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this guide.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 48 .
300
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for keyboard wedge host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 23 Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Keystroke Delay
Intra-keystroke Delay
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
Simulated Caps Lock
Caps Lock Override
Convert Case
Function Key Mapping
FN1 Substitution
Send Make and Break
Default
IBM AT Notebook
Send Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
No Delay
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Do Not Convert
Disable
Disable
Send Make and Break Scan
Codes
Page
Number
301
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the keyboard wedge host.
NOTE :
For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
*
IBM AT Notebook
Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
*
Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
302
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following barcodes to increase the delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.
*
No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Intra-keystroke Delay
Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release.
This also sets
Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.
Enable Intra-keystroke Delay
*
Disable Intra-keystroke Delay
303
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation
This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Country Codes
in a Microsoft system environment.
® operating
NOTE : If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see
Emulation on page 304 and ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 304
is enabled.
*
Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Quick Keypad Emulation
This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on the keyboard.
NOTE : This option applies only when
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.
*
Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
304
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Simulated Caps Lock
Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state. Note that this only applies to alpha characters.
NOTES : - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.
- Do not enable this parameter if either of the following parameters are enabled:
Convert to Upper Case on page 306
Convert to Lower Case on page 306
Enable Caps Lock
*
Disable Caps Lock
Caps Lock Override
Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the barcode transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the setting of the keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
NOTE : If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes precedence.
Enable Caps Lock Override
*
Disable Caps Lock Override
305
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE : Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
*
Do Not Convert
Function Key Mapping
ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see
Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
*
Disable Function Key Mapping
306
Keyboard Wedge Interface
FN1 Substitution
Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 barcode with a user-selected keystroke
(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 90
).
Enable FN1 Substitution
*
Disable FN1 Substitution
Send Make and Break
Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
NOTE : Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes .
*
Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
307
Keyboard Wedge Interface
Keyboard Map
The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix values, see
Prefix/Suffix Values on page 87
.
Figure 19 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 7010 7007
7006
7001
7009
7008 7011 7012 7003
7002 7004 7005
7015
7017 7016 7018
ASCII Character Sets
See
for the following information:
•
ASCII Character Set, Table 30 on page 451
•
ALT Key Character Set, Table 31 on page 456
• GUI Key Character Set,
•
PF Key Character Set, Table 33 on page 458
•
F Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 459
• Numeric Key Character Set,
•
Extended Key Character Set, Table 36 on page 460
308
OCR Programming
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming. The scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR E13B, and US Currency Serial Number.
OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit.
All OCR fonts are disabled by default. Enabling OCR could slow barcode decoding. You can enable OCR-A and
OCR-B at the same time, but not other combined font types.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
(1) Feature/option
Option value
309
OCR Programming
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to enable OCR-B, scan the Enable
OCR-B
barcode under OCR-B on page 313 . The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green,
signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
OCR Parameter Defaults
lists the defaults for OCR parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 24 OCR Programming Default Table
Parameter
Parameter
Number
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A 680
OCR-A Variant
OCR-B
684
681
OCR-B Variant
MICR E13B
US Currency Serial Number
OCR Orientation
685
682
683
687
OCR Lines
OCR Minimum Characters
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset
691
689
690
686
OCR Quiet Zone 695
SSI Number
F1h A8h
F1h ACh
F1h A9h
F1h ADh
F1h AAh
F1h ABh
F1h AFh
F1h B3h
F1h B1h
F1h B2h
F1h AEh
F1h B7h
Default Page Number
0 o
1
3
Disable
OCR-A Full ASCII
Disable
OCR-B Full ASCII
Disable
Disable
100
Selected font variant
50
310
OCR Programming
Table 24 OCR Programming Default Table (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number
SSI Number
OCR Template 547 F1h 23h
OCR Check Digit Modulus
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
688
700
F1h B0h
F1h BCh
OCR Check Digit Validation
Inverse OCR
OCR Redundancy
694
856
1770
F1h B6h
F2h 58h
F8h 06h EAh
Default
999999999
1
121212121212
None
Regular
Level 1
Page Number
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
Parameter # 680
SSI # F1h A8h
NOTE : OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 321
and
.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-A.
Enable OCR-A
(1)
*Disable OCR-A
(0)
311
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant
Parameter # 684
SSI # F1 ACh
NOTE : Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII).
The font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant, scan one of the following barcodes. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy.
OCR-A supports the following variants:
• OCR-A Full ASCII
!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
• OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>
Special banking characters output as the following representative characters:
outputs as f
outputs as c
outputs as h
*OCR-A Full ASCII
(0)
OCR-A Reserved 1
(1)
312
OCR-A Variant (continued)
OCR Programming
OCR-A Reserved 2
(2)
OCR-A Banking
(3)
OCR-B
Parameter # 681
SSI # F1h A9h
NOTE : OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See
and
.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-B.
Enable OCR-B
(1)
*Disable OCR-B
(0)
313
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant
Parameter # 685
SSI # F1h ADh
NOTE : Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII).
OCR-B has the following variants. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy.
• OCR-B Full ASCII
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
• OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
• OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
• OCR-B Visa Type A
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
• OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
This allows reading either TD1, TD2, Passport, Visa Type A, or Visa Type B without switching between these options. It automatically recognizes the travel document read.
Scanning any ISBN Book Number automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum.
314
OCR Programming
To choose a variant, scan one of the barcodes below. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically sets the appropriate
. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for that particular document type:
Variant
Passport
OCR Lines Setting
2
TD1 ID Cards
TD2 ID Cards
Visa Type A
Visa Type B
3
2
2
2
NOTE : When setting one of the variants above with both OCR-A and OCR-B enabled, the scanner reads the specified travel document but does not read OCR-A. When the OCR-B variant is set back to the default
(OCR-B Full ASCII), the scanner reads OCR-A.
*OCR-B Full ASCII
(0)
OCR-B Banking
(1)
OCR-B Limited
(2)
315
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
(6)
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR Programming
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
(7)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1)
3 Line ID Cards
(3)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2)
2-Line ID Cards
(8)
Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
(20)
OCR-B Passport
(4)
OCR-B Visa Type A
(9)
316
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR Programming
OCR-B Visa Type B
(10)
OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
(11)
MICR E13B
Parameter # 682
SSI # F1h AAh
NOTE : OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 321
and
.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MICR E13B.
MICR E 13B uses the following characters:
TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters: outputs as t
outputs as a
outputs as o
outputs as d
Enable MICR E13B
(1)
317
*Disable MICR E13B
(0)
OCR Programming
US Currency Serial Number
Parameter # 683
SSI # F1h ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Currency Serial Number.
NOTE : OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 321
and
.
Enable US Currency
(1)
*Disable US Currency
(0)
OCR Orientation
Parameter # 687
SSI # F1h AFh
Select one of five options to specify the orientation of the OCR to read:
• 0 o to the imaging engine (default)
• 270 o clockwise (or 90 o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine
• 180 o (upside down) to the imaging engine
• 90 o clockwise to the imaging engine
• Omnidirectional
Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
318
OCR Orientation (continued)
OCR Programming
*OCR Orientation 0 o
(0)
OCR Orientation 270 o
(1)
Clockwise
OCR Orientation 180 o
(2)
Clockwise
OCR Orientation 90 o
(3)
Clockwise
OCR Orientation Omnidirectional
(4)
319
OCR Programming
OCR Lines
Parameter # 691
SSI # F1h B3h
To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following barcodes. Selecting Visas, TD1, or TD2 ID cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines . Also see
*OCR 1 Line
(1)
OCR 2 Lines
(2)
OCR 3 Lines
(3)
OCR Minimum Characters
Parameter # 689
SSI # F1h B1h
To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are ignored. The default is 003.
OCR Minimum Characters
320
OCR Programming
OCR Maximum Characters
Parameter # 690
SSI # F1h B2h
To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are ignored. The default is 100.
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset
Parameter # 686
SSI # F1h AEh
3.
4.
1.
2.
Create an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding.
This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts.
To set or modify the OCR font subset:
Enable the appropriate OCR font(s).
Scan the OCR Subset barcode.
Scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from Alphanumeric Barcodes
.
Scan End of Message on page 322
.
OCR Subset
To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII , or OCR-B variant Full ASCII .
For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that
character set, or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 59 and re-program the scanner.
321
OCR Programming
OCR Quiet Zone
Parameter # 695
SSI # F1h B7h
This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate slanted characters, the End of Field count is approximately a count of 8 for a character width. For example, if set to 15, then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger quiet zones at each end of text line.
To set a quiet zone, scan the following barcode, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in
. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50, indicating a six character width quiet zone.
OCR Quiet Zone
OCR Template
Parameter # 547
SSI # F1h 23h
This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format. Carefully constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors.
To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template
barcode, and then scan barcodes on the following pages that correspond to numbers and letters to form the template expression. Then scan End of
Message . The default is 999999999 which accepts OCR strings containing any character.
OCR Template
End of Message
322
OCR Programming
Required Digit (9)
Only a numeric character is accepted in this position.
Template
99999
Valid data
12987
Valid data
30517
Invalid data
123AB
Required Alpha (A)
Only an alpha character is accepted in this position.
Template
AAAAA
Valid data
ABCDE
Valid data
UVWXY
Invalid data
12FGH
9
A
Optional Alphanumeric (1)
An alphanumeric character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
99991
Valid data
1234A
Valid data
12345
Invalid data
1234<
1
323
OCR Programming
Optional Alpha (2)
An alpha character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
AAAA2
Valid data
ABCDE
Valid data
WXYZ
Invalid data
ABCD6
2
Alpha or Digit (3)
An alphanumeric character is required in this position to validate the incoming data.
Template
33333
Valid data
12ABC
Valid data
WXY34
Invalid data
12AB<
3
Any Including Space & Reject (4)
Any character is accepted in this position, including space and reject. An underscore (_) represents rejects in the output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting.
Template
99499
Valid data
12$34
Valid data
34 98
4
324
OCR Programming
Any except Space & Reject (5)
Any character is accepted in this position, except a space or reject.
Template
55999
Valid data
A.123
Valid data
*Z456
Invalid data
A BCD
5
Optional Digit (7)
A numeric character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
99977
Valid data
12345
Valid data
789
Invalid data
789AB
Digit or Fill (8)
Any numeric or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template
88899
Valid data
12345
Valid data
>>789
Valid data
<<789
7
8
325
OCR Programming
Alpha or Fill (F)
Any alpha or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template
AAAFF
Valid data
ABCXY
Valid data
LMN>>
Valid data
ABC<5
F
Optional Space ( )
A space is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters.
Template
99 99
Valid data
12 34
Valid data
1234
Invalid data
67891
Space
Optional Small Special (.)
A special character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like characters. Small special characters are , and .
Template
AA.99
Valid data
MN.35
Valid data
XY98
Invalid data
XYZ12
.
326
OCR Programming
Other Template Operators
These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data.
Literal String (" and +)
to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data. There are two characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal string, use the other delimiter.
Template
"35+BC"
Valid data
35+BC
Invalid data
AB+22
“
+
New Line (E)
To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line.
Template
999EAAAA
Valid data
321
BCAD
Valid data
987
ZXYW
Invalid data
XYZW
12
E
String Extract (C)
This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string extract is structured as follows:
CbPe
Where:
• C is the string extract operator
• b is the string begin delimiter
• P is the category (one or more numeric or alpha characters) describing the string representation
• e is the string end delimiter
327
OCR Programming
Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream.
Template
C>A>
Incoming data
XQ3>ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123
1ABCZXYZ
Output
>ABCDE>
>ATHRUZ>
No Output
C
Ignore to End of Field (D)
This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template expression. Examples for the template 999D:
Template
999D
Incoming data
123-PED
357298
193
Output
123
357
193
D
Skip Until (P1)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can be used in two ways:
P1ct
Where:
• P1 is the Skip Until operator
• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
P1"s"t
Where:
• P1 is the Skip Until operator
• "s"
output
• t is one or more template characters
328
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in the template should accommodate this trigger.
Template
P1"PN"AA9999
Incoming data
123PN9876
PN1234
X-PN3592
Output
PN9876
PN1234
PN3592
P
1
Skip Until Not (P0)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output stream. It can be used in two ways:
P0ct
Where:
• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator
• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
P0"s"t
Where:
• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator
• "s"
is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 327
) that trigger the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
329
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator.
Template
P0A9999
Incoming data
BPN3456
PN1234
5341
Output
3456
1234
No output
Template
P0"PN"9999
Incoming data
PN3456
5341
PNPN7654
Output
3456
No output
7654
P
0
Repeat Previous (R)
This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required digits:
Template
AA9R
Incoming data
AB3
PN12345
32RM52700
Output
AB3
PN12345
No output
R
330
OCR Programming
Scroll Until Match (S)
This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template.
Template
S99999
Incoming data
AB3
PN12345
32RM52700
Output
No Output
12345
52700
S
Multiple Templates
Template on page 322 (scan the OCR Template barcode, and then barcodes corresponding to numbers and
letters to form the template expression, and then End of Message ) for each template in the multiple template string, using a capital letter X as a separator between templates.
For example, set the
99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE .
Template Examples
Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition.
Field Definition Description
" M" 99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits.
"X"997777"X" X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X.
9959775599 Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two characters, and two digits.
A55"-"999"-"99 A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits.
33A"."99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits.
999992991 Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric.
"PN98" Literal field - PN98
331
OCR Programming
OCR Check Digit Modulus
Parameter # 688
SSI # F1h B0h
The check digit is the last digit (in the right-most position) in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the collected data. This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The calculation is performed on incoming data
To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for Modulus 10, scan the following barcode, and then scan a
The default is 1 .
OCR Check Digit
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
Parameter # 700
SSI # F1h BCh
This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for character positions. For check digit validation, each character in scanned data has an assigned weight to use in calculating the check digit. The scanner OCR ships with the following weight equivalents:
0 = 0
1 = 1
2 = 2
3 = 3
4 = 4
5 = 5
6 = 6
7 = 7
8 = 8
9 = 9
A = 10
B = 11
C = 12
D = 13
E = 14
F = 15
G = 16
H = 17
I = 18
J = 19
K = 20
L = 21
M = 22
N = 23
O = 24
P = 25
Q = 26
R = 27
S = 28
T = 29
U = 30
V = 31
W = 32
X = 33
Y = 34
Z = 35
Space = 0
All other characters are equivalent to one (1).
You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default.
121212121212 (default)
123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See
OCR Check Digit Validation on page 333
)
332
OCR Programming
For example:
ISBN
Multiplier
0 2 0 1 1 8 3 9 9 4
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4
Product add 0 + 18 + 0 + 7 + 6 + 40 + 12 + 27 + 18 + 4 = 132
ISBN uses Modulus 11 for the check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit.
To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following barcode, and then scan numbers and letters to form the multiplier string from
. Then scan
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
OCR Check Digit Validation
Parameter # 694
SSI # F1h B6h
Use the following options to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme.
None
No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.
*No Check Digit
(0)
333
OCR Programming
Product Add Left to Right
).
Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, and the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier
Product
1
1
2
6
3
6
4
16
5
25
6
36
Product add 1+ 6+ 6+ 16+ 25+ 36= 90
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero).
Product Add Left to Right
(3)
Product Add Right to Left
).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit
Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132459 (check digit is 9)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9
Multiplier
Product
6
6
5 4
15 8
3
12
2
10
1
9
Product add 6+ 15+ 8+ 12+ 10+ 9= 60
334
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Product Add Right to Left
(1)
Digit Add Left to Right
).
Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Digit add 1+ 6+ 6+ 1+6+ 2+5+ 3+6= 36
The Check Digit Modulus is 12. It passes because 36 is divisible by 12 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Left to Right
(4)
335
OCR Programming
Digit Add Right to Left
).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
Multiplier
Product
Digit add
1
6
6
3
5
2
4
15 8
4
3
12
5
2
10
6
1
6
6+ 1+5+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0+ 6= 30
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 30 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Digit Add Right to Left
(2)
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit
Multiplier
Product
1
6
6
2
5
2
4
10 8
4
3
12
5
2
10
Product add 6+ 10+ 8+ 12+ 10= 46
6
1
6
6
336
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6.
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(5)
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder
).
The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 122459 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456
Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9
Multiplier
Product
Digit add
6
6
5 4
10 8
3
12
2
10
6+ 1+0+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0= 19
1
9
9
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9.
Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder
(6)
337
OCR Programming
Health Industry - HIBCC43
This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard. The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the character values in a given message, and is printed as the last character in a given message.
Example:
Supplier Labeling Data Structure: + A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1
Sum of values: 41+10+1+2+3+11+19+12+5+13+6+14+7+1 = 145
Divide 145 by 43. The quotient is 3 with a remainder of 16. The check digit is the character corresponding to the value of the remainder (see
Table 25 ), which in this example is 16, or
G . The complete Supplier Labeling Data
Structure, including the check digit, therefore is:
A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1 G
Table 25 Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit
0 = 0 9 = 9 I = 18 R = 27 - = 36
1 = 1
2 = 2
A = 10
B = 11
J = 19
K = 20
S = 28
T = 29
. = 37
Space = 38
3 = 3
4 = 4
5 = 5
C = 12
D = 13
E = 14
L = 21
M = 22
N = 23
U =30
V = 31
W = 32
$ = 39
/ = 40
+ = 41
% = 42 6 = 6
7 = 7
8 = 8
F = 15
G = 16
H = 17
O = 24
P = 25
Q = 26
X = 33
Y = 34
Z = 35
Health Industry - HIBCC43
(9)
338
OCR Programming
Inverse OCR
Parameter # 856
SSI # F2h 58h
Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background. Select an option for decoding inverse OCR:
• Regular Only - Decode regular OCR (black on white) strings only.
• Inverse Only - Decode inverse OCR (white on black) strings only.
• Autodiscriminate - Decode both regular and inverse OCR strings.
*Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
339
OCR Programming
OCR Redundancy
Parameter # 1770
SSI # F8h 06h EAh
This option adjusts the number of times to decode an OCR text string before transmission. There are three levels of OCR decode redundancy. There is an inverse relationship between the redundancy level and OCR decoding aggressiveness. Increasing the level of the redundancy can reduce OCR scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of redundancy necessary.
• OCR Redundancy Level 1 : This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state while providing sufficient accuracy in decoding most in-spec OCR text strings.
• OCR Redundancy Level 2 : This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
• OCR Redundancy Level 3 : Select this option with greater redundancy requirements if OCR Redundancy
Level 2 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
*
OCR Redundancy Level 1
(1)
OCR Redundancy Level 2
(2)
OCR Redundancy Level 3
(3)
340
Intelligent Document
Capture (Hand-held Mode
Only)
Introduction
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) is Zebra advanced image processing firmware for select imager based scanners. This chapter describes the IDC functionality, provides parameter barcodes to control IDC features, and includes a quick start procedure.
The IDC Process
Intelligent Document Capture:
3.
4.
1.
2.
Verifies a barcode is appropriate to use as an IDC anchor or link. See
Barcode Acceptance Test on page 341
.
.
Processes the captured image. See
Image Post Processing on page 343
.
Transmits the data. See Data Transmission on page 343 .
Barcode Acceptance Test
Upon decoding a barcode, the scanner checks that the barcode fits the description of a barcode that anchors or links to an IDC form. To be accepted as an IDC barcode:
• The symbology must be enabled for decode, and also enabled via
. The IDC firmware allows enabling between zero and eight symbologies simultaneously:
Code 128, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, PDF417, Data Matrix, and EAN-128.
• The decoded data must satisfy the values set in the
Length parameters. To disable either of these checks, set the value to zero.
If the barcode does not satisfy both requirements, it is sent as a normal (non-IDC) decode.
An IDC barcode is required when
IDC Operating Mode on page 345 is set to
Anchored or Linked .
Free-Form operating mode does not require a barcode, but transmits decoded data if one is found and satisfies the requirements. If no barcode is decoded, the document capture process starts but may require specifying a non-zero value for the
. The scanner must wait for at least this amount of time after trigger pull before capturing a document, unless a barcode is decoded before the time expires.
If
scanner’s decode range, and the region to capture must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view.
341
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Capture Region Determination
After accepting an IDC barcode, the firmware establishes the region to capture as an image. The method used depends on the setting of the
IDC Operating Mode as follows.
The IDC firmware emits a single low beep after successfully capturing a region. The scanner is then no longer capturing images and can be moved without disturbing the IDC output. Be sure to hold the trigger button until the decode beep, otherwise the IDC process may be aborted.
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored
A coordinate system is built based on the barcode in its rectified (de-skewed) form. The origin is the center of the barcode, and the x-axis is set toward the right, from the barcode's point of view. The unit module width of the barcode is the unit for x. Similarly, the y-axis is set toward the up direction. The unit for the y-axis is specified via
to zero to automatically calculate the aspect ratio. The barcode can be of different sizes for the same form, as long as the center of the barcode is the same when the barcode's length changes.
From this coordinate system, the IDC area is determined using four parameters: offsets in x and y (
,
IDC Y Coordinate ) to the region's top-left corner, and width and height ( IDC Width
).
If the capture area is relatively large as compared to the barcode area, the calculation to obtain the capture area is prone to significant errors. A recommended solution is to enclose the form with a single black-lined rectangular border (a box), which is not in contact with any other line on the outside of the form (although it can be connected
does not decode if any edges are broken (such as by a protruding thumb).
The
percentage of the
parameter. For example, if
unit module is scaled to two pixels).
The
parameter controls the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis.
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked
The document capture region is a rectangular piece of paper, or a portion of it enclosed by a rectangular border. In either case, all four sides of the capture region must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view, and there must be sufficient contrast at the border of the capture region. For example, if a piece of white paper contains the document to capture, it must be put in front of a dark background.
By default, the scanner captures the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view. To specify a particular border type, use the
The region must contain at least 10% of the field-of-view in two dimensions.
If an IDC barcode is decoded, IDC uses its location to start the search for the capture region. Otherwise, it searches the capture region from the center of the field-of-view. IDC also uses the orientation of a decoded IDC barcode to orient the output image.
342
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Image Post Processing
After determining the document capture region, the firmware de-skews and re-samples the region as follows.
Enabling IDC Captured Image Brighten
calls normalization, which makes the brightness of the image uniform, and enhances contrast as a large percent of background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if the firmware determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area). Enabling
enhances the sharpness of the image.
IDC re-samples the image about one output pixel per input pixel for Free-Form or Linked modes and two pixels-per-module in Anchored mode.
, and
Note that it may take several seconds for post processing to complete, depending on the size of the captured region, the options enabled, and the scanner model.
Data Transmission
After processing the captured image, IDC assembles the image with the decoded barcode data (if applicable) into an ISO/IEC 15434 style packet and transmits it to the host. The scanner issues the standard decode beep and the
trigger can be released. Be sure to set the USB Device Type on page 237
to Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with
Imaging Interface .
PC Application and Programming Support
For a sample application running on the Microsoft Windows operating system, contact your Zebra representative.
This application displays barcode data and/or captured images from Intelligent Document Capture enabled scanners and allows setting and reading IDC parameters. Complete source code and documentation are also provided for developing custom applications. The application includes documentation for the ISO/IEC 15434 format as used by the IDC firmware and C# code to process it.
Setting Parameters
This section describes the parameters controlling the IDC firmware and provides programming barcodes for setting them.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 26 on page 344
for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE : Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or spaces do not merge.
343
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
To return all features to default values, scan the barcode menus, asterisks (
*
Set Factory Defaults on page 59
) indicate default values.
*
Indicates default
*
Enable Parameter
(1) Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples
In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the document capture file format to BMP, scan the BMP
barcode under IDC File Format Selector on page 350 . The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
Errors While Scanning
Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults
lists defaults for IDC parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in memory. To recall default parameter values, see
.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan
configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools .
NOTE : See
Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Alternatively, use the sample application to set parameters using the parameter name. The application provides prompts and error checking to assist in setting the parameters correctly and easily. You must use an application to
set a parameter to a negative value, as the IDC X Coordinate can require.
Table 26 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults
Parameter Parameter Name
Parameter
Number 1
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode DocCap_MODE 594
IDC Symbology
IDC X Coordinate
DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
DocCap_X
655
596
SSI
Number
F1h 52h
F1h 8Fh
2
Default
Off
001
F4h F1h 54h -151
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
344
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Table 26 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter Parameter Name
Parameter
Number 1
SSI
Number 2
IDC Y Coordinate DocCap_Y 597
Default
F4h F1h 55h -050
IDC Width
IDC Height
DocCap_WIDTH
DocCap_HEIGHT
598
599
F1h 56h
F1h 57h
0300
0050
IDC Aspect
IDC File Format Selector
IDC Bits Per Pixel
IDC JPEG Quality
DocCap_ASPECT
DocCap_FMT
DocCap_BPP
DocCap_JPEG_Qual
595
601
602
603
F1h 53h
F1h 59h
F1h 5Ah
F1h 5Bh
000
JPEG
8 BPP
065
IDC Find Box Outline
IDC Minimum Text Length
Sig_FINDBOX
DocCap_MIN_TEXT
IDC Maximum Text Length DocCap_MAX_TEXT
IDC Captured Image Brighten Sig_BRIGHTEN
IDC Captured Image Sharpen Sig_SHARPEN
IDC Border Type DocCap_BORDER
IDC Delay Time
IDC Zoom Limit
IDC Maximum Rotation
DocCap_DELAY
Sig_MIN_PERCENT
Sig_MAX_ROT
727
656
657
654
658
829
830
651
652
F1h D7h
F1h 90h
F1h 91h
F1h 8Eh
F1h 92h
F2h 3Dh
F2h 3Eh
F1h 8Bh
F1h 8Ch
Disable
00
00
Enable
Enable
None
000
000
00
Page
Number
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
IDC Operating Mode
Parameter Name: DocCap_MODE
Parameter # 594
SSI # F1h 52h
Select the operating mode of the Intelligent Document Capture firmware:
• Off - Disables the IDC feature.
• Anchored - Requires a barcode decode. The image capture region is based off this barcode.
• Free-Form - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is optional.
345
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
• Linked - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is required.
IDC Operating Mode (continued)
*
Off
(0)
Anchored
(1)
Free-Form
(2)
Linked
(3)
IDC Symbology
Parameter Name: DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
Parameter # 655
SSI # F1h 8Fh
Select the barcode type(s) to use when Document Capture mode is not set to Off . To enable more than one symbology at a time, simply add the values together. For example, to enable PDF417, Data Matrix, and Code 39 write a value of 98 (32 + 64 + 2).
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from
in the range of 001 to 511 decimal. The default is 001.
Table 27 IDC Symbologies
Symbology
Code 128
Code 39
I 2 of 5
Value (Decimal)
1
2
4
346
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Table 27 IDC Symbologies (Continued)
Symbology
D 2 of 5
Codabar
PDF417
Data Matrix
EAN 128
Aztec
Value (Decimal)
8
16
32
64
128
256
IDC Symbology
IDC X Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_X
Parameter # 596
SSI # F4h F1h 54h
This parameter only applies when
Anchored. Specify the horizontal offset to the top left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the left.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1279. The default is -151. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC X Coordinate
347
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Y Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_Y
Parameter # 597
SSI # F4h F1h 55h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode
is set to Anchored. Specify the vertical offset to the top left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the top.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1023. The default is -050. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC Y Coordinate
IDC Width
Parameter Name: DocCap_WIDTH
Parameter # 598
SSI # F1h 56h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Anchored. Specify the width of the region to capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0300.
IDC Width
348
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Height
Parameter Name: DocCap_HEIGHT
Parameter # 599
SSI # F1h 57h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Anchored. Specify the height of the region to capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0050.
IDC Height
IDC Aspect
Parameter Name: DocCap_ASPECT
Parameter # 595
SSI # F1h 53h
This parameter only applies when
Anchored . Specify the barcode's aspect ratio of a thin bar or space. The barcode's height is divided by this value to obtain the unit in the y-axis. Set this parameter to zero to calculate the aspect value automatically.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 000 to 255. The default is 000.
IDC Aspect
349
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC File Format Selector
Parameter Name: DocCap_FMT
Parameter # 601
SSI # F1h 59h
Select a document capture file format appropriate for your system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The scanner stores captured areas in the selected format.
*
JPEG
(1)
BMP
(3)
TIFF
(4)
350
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Bits Per Pixel
Parameter Name: DocCap_BPP
Parameter # 602
SSI # F1h 5Ah
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black and white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE : The scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
*
8 BPP
(2)
IDC JPEG Quality
Parameter Name: DocCap_JPEG_Qual
Parameter # 603
SSI # F1h 5Bh
Set the amount of JPEG compression to perform on the captured image. Higher numbers produce a better quality image but larger files.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 005 to 100 decimal. The default is 065.
IDC JPEG Quality
351
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Find Box Outline
Parameter Name: Sig_FINDBOX
Parameter # 727
SSI # F1h D7h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Anchored . Scan Enable Find Box Outline to search for a rectangular border during document capture.
Enable Find Box Outline
(1)
*
Disable Find Box Outline
(0)
IDC Minimum Text Length
Parameter Name: DocCap_MIN_TEXT
Parameter # 656
SSI # F1h 90h
Specify the minimum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 00 to 55 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Minimum Text Length
352
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Maximum Text Length
Parameter Name: DocCap_MAX_TEXT
Parameter # 657
SSI # F1h 91h
Specify the maximum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 00 to 55 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Text Length
IDC Captured Image Brighten
Parameter Name: Sig_BRIGHTEN
Parameter # 654
SSI # F1h 8Eh
Enable Captured Image Brighten to make image brightness uniform and enhance contrast such that a large percent of the background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if the program determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area).
NOTE : This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
*
Enable Captured Image Brighten
(1)
353
Disable Captured Image Brighten
(0)
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
Parameter Name: Sig_SHARPEN
Parameter # 658
SSI # F1h 92h
Enable this to enhance the sharpness of the image.
NOTE : This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
*
Enable Captured Image Sharpen
(1)
Disable Captured Image Sharpen
(0)
354
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Border Type
Parameter Name: DocCap_BORDER
Parameter # 829
SSI # F2h 3Dh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Free-Form or Linked. Select the style of border used to determine the outline of the capture region:
• None - Capture the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view.
• Black - The border must be black (such as a printed rectangular border).
• White - The border must be white (e.g., paper edge on a dark background).
• Advanced Edge Detection (AED) - Capture a region defined by edges of any color and potentially broken.
*
None
(0)
Black
(1)
White
(2)
Advanced Edge Detection (AED)
(3)
355
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Delay Time
Parameter Name: DocCap_DELAY
Parameter # 830
SSI # F2h 3Eh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Free-Form. Set the delay for capturing a document after a trigger pull. Decoding a barcode aborts this delay.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 000 to 200 decimal in units of 10 msec. The default is 000.
IDC Delay Time
IDC Zoom Limit
Parameter Name: Sig_MIN_PERCENT
Parameter # 651
SSI # F1h 8Bh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Anchored. Set the minimal "zoom" percentage value of a form for it to be considered for capture. This controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware rejects capturing a form unless the width is at least the
parameter.
For example, if you set this parameter to 100 and
to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide before it is captured (each unit module is scaled to two pixels).
Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 000 to 100 percent. The default is 000.
IDC Zoom Limit
356
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Maximum Rotation
Parameter Name: Sig_MAX_ROT
Parameter # 652
SSI # F1h 8Ch
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to
Anchored. Set the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis for it to be considered for capture. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes
in the range of 00 to 45 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Rotation
357
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
Quick Start
provide an understanding of how to use IDC. These examples do not illustrate all capabilities of the advanced IDC firmware. Build upon these using different parameter settings and forms.
Sample IDC Setup
1.
2.
To set up IDC:
Connect a scanner equipped with IDC to the host computer's USB port.
To set the scanner to the default settings and proper USB host type, scan Set Defaults followed by the
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface barcode. Allow time for the scanner to reset and the
USB connection to remunerate after each scan before continuing.
Set Defaults
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
3.
4.
5.
Start the sample application and select the scanner in the SNAPI Scanners drop-down menu.
Set parameters as specified in
IDC Demonstrations on page 359
using the sample application or by scanning parameter barcodes in this guide. The barcode in the sample form is Code 128, which is enabled by default for decoding and as a Document Capture symbology. You can change these settings for your IDC application.
Perform each demo. When scanning, aim the scanner at the barcode in the center of the rectangle. Pull the scanner back so the rectangle is fully contained in the aiming pattern. When you pull the trigger, the scanner emits a low tone to indicate that the IDC firmware identified and captured an image, then a decode beep to indicate that the data transmitted. There may be several seconds between the two beeps, depending on the size of the captured image and options selected (de-skew, brighten, etc). You can move the scanner after the first beep, but continue the hold the trigger or the scanner may end the session before sending the data.
358
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
IDC Demonstrations
Anchored Mode Demo
• Set
IDC Operating Mode on page 345 to
Anchored .
• Set parameters to these values:
• Set
to 100 .
• Set
90 .
• Set
IDC X Coordinate on page 347 to
-175 .
• Set
IDC Y Coordinate on page 348 to
-50 .
• Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the text scroll.
• Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with the form rotated counter-clockwise or upside down).
• Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. The captured area changes in size and location.
• Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper (or your finger) and pull the trigger. The scanner does not decode the barcode or capture an image.
What This Demonstrates
Anchored mode captures an image of fixed size and location relative to a barcode on the page. Parameters control the height, width, and location. The IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Free-Form Mode Demo
• Set
IDC Operating Mode on page 345 to
Free-Form .
• Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the entire rectangle, including the contents.
• Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. Note that the captured image is not affected.
• Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with the form rotated counterclockwise or upside down).
• Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper and pull the trigger. The scanner does not decode the barcode and does not re-orient the captured image to the normal position, i.e., with the logo in the upper-left corner.
What This Demonstrates
Free-Form mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. It adjusts the image to the upright orientation if a barcode is found and decoded in the image.
Linked Mode Demo
Set
IDC Operating Mode on page 345 to
Linked .
decode the barcode or capture an image.
359
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)
What This Demonstrates
Linked mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. The
IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Other Suggestions
Hold the scanner at an angle (up/down or side to side) to the page instead of perpendicular to it. The IDC firmware de-skews and adjusts the brightness (enabled by default) to produce a quality image when the scanner is held at less than ideal conditions.
Quick Start Form
Figure 20 Quick Start Form
360
Digimarc
Introduction
Digimarc Barcode is a machine-readable code that is invisible to people.
NOTE : SR and DL models support Digimarc.
HD and HL (HD focus with DL parsing) models do not support Digimarc.
Digimarc Symbology Selection
Digimarc codes are reported as UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13 or GS1 DataBar Expanded.
NOTE : Conversion of the Digimarc reported code types to other barcode types is not supported.
AIM and Symbol code IDs are supported for the reported Digimarc code types.
Picklist
The Digimarc decoder searches configured block areas of the image for Digimarc codes. The Digimarc decoder works the same whether or not Picklist is enabled or disabled.
NOTE : Decode time could be greater given the extra processing done by system and decoder when in Picklist mode.
361
Digimarc
Digimarc Digital Watermarks
Parameter # 1687
SSI # F8h 06h 97h
To enable or disable the Digimarc Digital Watermarks code scan the appropriate barcode below.
Enabling Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW increases decode times slightly. Increasing the Timeout
Between Decodes, Same Symbol on page 77 may be required to avoid double decodes.
Enable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW
(1)
*
Disable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW
(0)
362
Data Formatting: ADF,
MDF, Preferred Symbol
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra features available for customizing scanner operation.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) allows customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit scanned data to suit the host application's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is programmed using 123Scan.
For a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to: zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only)
Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) enables a 2D scanner to scan all barcodes on a label with a single trigger pull, and then modify and transmit the data to meet host application requirements. MDF supports programming up to nine unique labels into one scanner. MDF also supports scanning multiple barcodes on opposite sides of a box by holding the trigger.
MDF options include:
• Output all or specific barcodes.
• Control the barcode output sequence.
• Apply unique multicode data formatting (MDF) to each output barcode.
• Discard scanned data if all required barcodes are not present.
363
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Programming a Scanner
• Using 123Scan, programming an MDF is similar to programming an ADF rule. MDF programming is saved in a 123Scan configuration file.
• MDF can be deployed to a fleet of 2D scanners using the Scanner Management Service (SMS) through a traditional SMS package.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx.
For a video on Creating an Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) Rule using 123Scan, go to: zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos .
MDF in Hands-Free Mode
MDF in a hands-free scanning mode may yield multiple unexpected and undesired outputs when a label (most likely on a complex label) passes through the scanner's field of view. This problem happens when the complex label’s barcodes can be matched by more than one group (for example, Group 1 represents all barcodes present and Group 2 represent some barcodes present).
NOTE : A similar problem can also occur in the hand-held trigger mode. If multiple MDF rules/groups exist and all the label is not in the field of view when pressing the trigger, the output may vary depending on which
MDF rules/groups match.
The problem is demonstrated in
and as follows:
1.
2.
As the label is moving through the field of view, it is first partially read (some of the barcodes in the field of view in Frame 2).
Then, the second decode occurs as it is fully read (all the barcodes in the field of view in Frame 3).
3.
This yields two different outputs (instead of the expected single output) from the presentation of a label. This problem is driven by a complex label inadvertently matching two different MDF rules/groups, thereby yielding two outputs.
Figure 21 Scanning Label in a Horizontal Orientation
Field of View - Frame 1
No label in field of view
Field of View - Frame 2
2 Barcodes Visible
Partial label in field of view
Match MDF Rule for Group 2
Output 2 barcodes
Field of View - Frame 3
3 Barcodes Visible
Full label in field of view
Match MDF Rule for Group 1
Output 3 barcodes
NOTE :
To minimize issues associated with MDF hands-free mode, see MDF Best Practices on page 365
.
364
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
MDF Best Practices
Suggestions to minimize the undesired multiple outputs during the MDF scanning in hands-free mode are as follows:
• Scan barcodes in a vertical orientation (see
Figure 22 Scanning Label in a Vertical Orientation
• When creating the MDF programming with multiple groups, the Group 1's pattern match should be the most complicated (hardest to match), which equals to the most number of barcodes and criteria. Then
Group 2, 3, and so on should be progressively matched more easily.
• When defining criteria, avoid enabling an output when the pattern is not matched. Set Output if NO pattern match set as Discard bar code
Figure 23 Figure Match Setting for Output
Discard bar code
365
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
• Select Discard barcode(s) NOT within the pattern match in the 123Scan MDF setting. For more details, select What is this? located next to this selection.
• To prevent double decodes of the same symbol, increase the Timeout Between Same Symbols setting.
See
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol on page 77 for more details.
• Turn the scanner's aimer on to assist operators in scanning the barcode in a more consistent manner.
• Other reasons a label/barcode may not be decoded while in the field of view are as follows:
• The label out of focus (too close or too far away). See
Decode Ranges on page 44 for correct working
range.
• Specular reflection (reflection off a shiny surface).
• The label is presented at extreme angle to scanner.
Preferred Symbol
Preferred Symbol is a barcode prioritization technique that enables favored decoding of high priority barcode(s).
The Preferred Symbol is the only barcode that is decoded and output within the preset Preferred Symbol Timeout.
During this time, the scanner attempts to decode the prioritized barcode and reports only this barcode.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx.
To program Preferred Symbol via 123Scan, select 123Scan > Configuration Wizard > Symbologies screen, and then select Preferred Symbol from the drop-down menu. Preferred Symbol programming is saved in the 123Scan configuration file.
Data Parsing (UDI Scan+, Label Parse+ and Blood Bag Parse+)
Data Parsing allows a Zebra scanner to scan a UDI label, GS1 label, or Blood Bags with one or more barcodes encoded with multiple data fields (such as date of manufacture, expiration date, batch number, GTIN, and SSCC) and transmit select data fields and not others, in a specific order to a host application. Simply wave the scanner over all the barcodes while holding the trigger and the scanner takes care of the rest.
The scanner finds and transmits only the required data fields, even if they are spread across multiple barcodes and on different sides of the container. In addition, the scanner can insert field separators (such as tab, enter, and slash) to automate data entry into a host application.
Programming your scanner is easy using 123Scan’s intuitive drag and drop interface. For more information on writing a Data Parsing Rule, refer to the Data Parsing (UDI, GS1 Label, Blood Bag) on Zebra Scanners User Guide available at: zebra.com/support .
To watch a video on Creating a Data Parsing Rule using 123Scan, go to: zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos .
366
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Scan a UDI Label using UDI Scan+
Government regulatory agencies 1 establish Unique Device Identification (UDI) standards to identify and monitor the distribution and use of medical devices within healthcare environments. These UDI standards identify medical devices from manufacturing through distribution to patient use - enabling complete traceability of the millions of individual medical devices utilized for patient care. To enable UDI compliance, all medical devices must carry a
UDI label to enable “track and trace” from the point of production, during shipment, through the product’s use and disposal.
NOTE : 1 United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), European Commission, International
Medical Device Regulatory Forum .
Scan a GS1 Label using Label Parse+
The GS1 Organization, an international standards body, has released specifications used worldwide for generating shipping labels. These labels are used when shipping packages (logistics), raw materials and produce.
Scan a Blood Bag Label using Blood Bag Parse+
The ICCBBA Organization, an international standards body, has released a specification used worldwide for generating blood bag labels. These labels are used when shipping, storing and using blood bags. For more information, go to: iccbba.org/tech-library/iccbba-documents/standards-documents/standard-labeling-blood2 .
367
Driver’s License Set Up
(DS9908-DL/HL)
Introduction
The scanner uses internally embedded algorithms to parse out barcode information from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
Scanning these barcodes produces formatted data for use in age verification, credit card application information, and more.
This chapter describes how to program the scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D barcodes on US driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
Table 28 DL Parsing Parameter Table
Parameter
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver’s License Parsing
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
Parser Version ID Barcode
Set Default Parameter
Output Gender as M or F
Date Format
No Separator
Send Keystroke
Control Characters
Keyboard Characters
Default
No Driver’s License Parsing
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CCYYMMDD
N/A
N/A
Page Number
Parsing Rule Example
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing ADF Example
N/A
N/A
368
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Driver’s License Parsing
Parameter # 645
SSI # F1 85
To enable driver's license parsing on the scanner, scan the Embedded Driver's License Parsing barcode. This does not require Zebra software (.DLL).
Scan the barcodes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the scanner
outputs. See Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page 370
for more information.
*
No Driver’s License Parsing
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
369
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Pars
-
ing)
To program a parsing rule:
1.
2.
3.
Scan Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 371
.
Scan any of the field barcodes on the following pages, or
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 386
.
After entering the entire rule, scan
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 371 to save the rule.
NOTE : The scanner stores only one driver’s license parsing rule in memory at a time. Saving a new rule replaces the prior rule.
. Any previously saved rule is retained.
To erase a saved rule, scan Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules on page 371
.
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type
After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules to the parsed data using the Parsed Driver’s License criterion barcode in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide.
NOTE : Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's
License Parsing.
See
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 408 for a sample ADF rule using this code type
criterion.
370
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules
The supported parse fields begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs can have separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, while others have a single field with the entire name. Also, some IDs expire on the subject's birth date while the expiration date field only indicates the year. To present data in a consistent format, use the following nine barcodes to return data calculated from the actual data contained in the ID barcode.
First Name
Middle Name/Initial
371
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Last Name
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
Expiration Date
Birth Date
Issue Date
ID Number (Formatted)
372
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
AAMVA Issuer ID
Full Name
Last Name
First Name
Middle Name / Initial
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
373
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Mailing Address Line 1
Mailing Address Line 2
Mailing Address City
Mailing Address State
Mailing Address Postal Code
Home Address Line 1
Home Address Line 2
374
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Home Address City
Home Address State
Home Address Postal Code
License ID Number
License Class
License Restrictions
License Endorsements
375
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Height (Feet and/or Inches)
Height (Centimeters)
Weight (Pounds)
Weight (Kilograms)
Eye Color
Hair Color
License Expiration Date
376
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Birth Date
Gender
License Issue Date
License Issue State
Social Security Number
Permit Class
Permit Expiration Date
377
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Permit ID Number
Permit Issue Date
Permit Restrictions
Permit Endorsements
AKA Social Security Name
AKA Full Name
AKA Last Name
AKA First Name
378
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
AKA Middle Name / Initial
AKA Name Suffix
AKA Name Prefix
AKA Birth Date
Issue Timestamp
Number of Duplicates
Medical Codes
379
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Organ Donor
Nonresident
Customer ID
Weight Range
Document Discriminator
Country
Federal Commission Codes
380
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Place of Birth
Audit Information
Inventory Control
Race / Ethnicity
Std Vehicle Class
Std Endorsements
Std Restrictions
381
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Class Description
Endorsement Description
Restrictions Description
Height in Inches
Height in Centimeters
Parser Version ID Barcode
Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification
Parser Version ID
382
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this barcode to return all parameters to the default values listed in
*
Set All Defaults
Output Gender as M or F
Scan this barcode to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value .
Output gender as M or F
383
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Date Format
Use these barcodes to select the date format to display. Date fields include the following:
• CCYY = 4-digit year ( CC =2-digit century [00-99], YY =2-digit year in the century [00-99])
• MM = 2-digit month [01-12]
• DD = 2-digit day of the month [00-31]
The default is CCYYMMDD .
NOTE : To specify a date separator, i.e., a character separating each field of the date, scan the Send
<character> barcode that corresponds to the alphanumeric character to use as the date separator immediately following the date format barcode. To select no date separator, scan the No Separator DL parsing rule immediately following the date format barcode.
*CCYYMMDD
CCYYDDMM
MMDDCCYY
MMCCYYDD
DDMMCCYY
DDCCYYMM
384
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Date Format (continued)
YYMMDD
YYDDMM
MMDDYY
MMYYDD
DDMMYY
DDYYMM
No Separator
Scan this barcode immediately following a date format barcode to use no separator character between the date fields.
No Separator
385
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)
Control Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keystroke to send.
Send Control A
Send Control B
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
386
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control I
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
387
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
388
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
389
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keyboard characters to send.
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
390
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
391
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
392
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
393
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
394
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
Send D
Send E
Send F
395
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
396
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
397
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
398
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
399
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
400
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
401
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
402
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
403
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send Tab Key
Send Enter Key
Parsing Rule Example
Scan the following barcodes in sequence to program the scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and last names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing address postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver’s license barcode.
NOTE : This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, enable
to send the Enter key properly.
1
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
2
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
3
First Name
404
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
4
Send Space
5
Middle Name / Initial
6
Send Space
7
Last Name
8
Send Enter Key
9
Mailing Address Line 1
405
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
10
Send Space
11
Mailing Address Line 2
12
Send Enter Key
13
Mailing Address City
14
Send Space
15
Mailing Address State
406
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Parsing Rule Example (continued)
16
Send Space
17
Mailing Address Postal Code
18
Send Enter Key
19
Birth Date
20
Send Enter Key
21
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
407
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example
This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format:
Last Name, First Name
1
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
2
Last Name
3
Send ,
4
Send Space
5
First Name
6
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
408
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9908-DL/HL)
Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:
1
Begin New Rule
2
Criterion: Parsed Driver's License
3
Action: Send Next 15 Characters
4
Save Rule
For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after applying the previous ADF rule.
409
Custom Tone
Introduction
The imager supports downloading a custom tone to sound when a good decode occurs. Create the audio tone according to the following specifications:
• Use a WAV audio file format; acceptable file extensions are .wav and .wave.
• Encode the audio file at 16 samples per second, i.e., 16 kHz sampling rate.
• Encode the audio file at 16 bits per sample.
• Encode the audio file with a single channel (mono).
• WAVE audio type/format = PCM (Pulse Coded Modulation).
• Ensure the audio file does not exceed 65 kBytes.
• Ensure the audio file name does not exceed 31 bytes.
410
Custom Tone
Downloading a Custom Tone via 123Scan
Download the custom audio file to the imager using 123Scan. See
123Scan and Software Tools for more
information on this utility.
1.
2.
Download and install Zebra's 123Scan Scanner Configuration Utility from the support web site: zebra.com/123Scan .
Open 123Scan.
Figure 24 123Scan Utility
3.
Select Clone/modify my connected scanner settings.
Figure 25 USB Parameter Change Window
4.
Select CLOSE on the pop-up window.
411
Figure 26 General Parameters Section
Custom Tone
5.
6.
Select General > Beeper .
Choose the Select Tone from PC button to navigate to and select the custom tone.
Figure 27 Enable Custom Scan Tone Window
7.
Select YES on the pop-up window to set the Scan Tone parameter to the User Programmable/Tone 6 option. The
Scan Tone field indicates Tone 6 - User Programmable, and the Set Custom Scan Tone field now reflects the selected WAV file name.
412
Custom Tone
Figure 28 Updated General Parameters Section
8.
Select Load to scanner at the top of the window.
Figure 29 Load Configuration Window
9.
Select a scanner in the list, or select LOAD TO ALL SCANNERS to send the configuration file to all scanners listed.
413
Custom Tone
Figure 30 Load Configuration Complete Window
10.
11.
Select CLOSE when the upload completes.
Verify that the custom tone was successfully downloaded to the scanner by scanning a barcode.
Downloading a Custom Tone via Scanner SDK Sample Application
2.
3.
Download a custom audio file to the imager using the Scanner SDK C++ Sample Application . The user-defined tone is represented by a unique attribute number.
1.
Place the imager in SNAPI USB communication mode by scanning Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging
Ensure the imager is disconnected from the host PC.
To launch the Scanner SDK C++ Sample Application, on the host PC select Start > Scanner > Scanner SDK
> C++ Sample Application .
414
Custom Tone
Figure 31 Scanner SDK C++ Sample Application
8.
9.
10.
6.
7.
4.
5.
11.
Connect the imager to a USB port on the PC and wait for the power-up tone.
Verify imager is operational by touching the trigger to turn on illumination.
Select Discover Scanners in the SDK application. The imager appears in the Connected Scanners list.
Select the Advanced tab.
In the Custom Good Decode Tone section of the window, select Browse.
Select the WAV file to download. Ensure the file does not exceed 65 kB.
Select Upload . After a few seconds the status bar on the bottom of the window displays
UPDATE_AUDIO_FILE - Command Success .
Scan the Scan Tone 6 barcode below to select the downloaded tone. This barcode is also available via the
parameter Beep Tone on page 62
.
12.
Scan Tone 6
Scan a barcode (e.g., the sample below) to verify that the imager sounds the downloaded scan tone.
415
Figure 32 Sample Barcode
Custom Tone
NOTE : The imager sounds a system-defined tone on a good decode if you select Scan Tone 6 but did not download a custom tone.
416
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults
Parameter
Serial Number
Report Software Version
Manufacturing Information
Standard User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Parameter Barcode Scanning
Beep After Good Decode
Beep Volume
Beep Tone
Beep Duration
Suppress Power Up Beeps
Direct Decode Indicator
Low Power Mode
Time Delay to Low Power Mode
Trigger Mode (or Hand-held Trigger
Mode)
Hands-free Mode 630
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern 306
Pickup Activation 1927
145
628
721
859
N/A
236
56
140
128
146
138
Parameter
Number 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ECh
38h
8Ch
91h
SSI
F1h 74h
F1h D1h
F2h 5Bh
80h
92h
8Ah
2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Enable
Enable
High
Medium
Short
Do Not Suppress
Disable
Disable
1 Hour
Auto Aim
Default
F1h 76h
F0h 32h
Enable
Enable
F8h 07h 87h Touch Plus
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
417
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode
Aiming Pattern
Picklist Mode
Continuous Barcode Read
Unique Barcode Reporting
Decode Session Timeout
Hands-Free Decode Session
Timeout
Parameter
Number 1
590
402
649
723
136
400
SSI
Number
F1h 4Eh
F0h 92h
F1h 89h
F1h D3h
88h
F0 90
2
Default
Disable Presentation
(Hands-free) Decode Aiming
Pattern
Enable
9.9 Seconds
15
Timeout Between Decodes, Same
Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes,
Different Symbols
137
144
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol 724
Mobile Phone/Display Mode 716
PDF Prioritization
PDF Prioritization Timeout
719
720
Decoding Illumination
Illumination Brightness
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held
Trigger Mode Only)
298
669
858
Product ID (PID) Type
Product ID (PID) Value
ECLevel
Decode Range Limit (Hands-free)
1281
1725
1710
1950
89h
90h
F1h D4h
F1h CCh
F1h CFh
F1h D0h
F0h 2Ah
F1h 9Dh
F2h 5Ah
0.5 Seconds
0.1 Seconds
Disable
Normal
Disable
200 ms
Enable
High
Less Motion Tolerance
F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique
F8h 06h BDh 0
F8h 06h AEh 0
F8h 07h 9Eh Standard
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
Disable Picklist Mode Always
Disable
418
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Miscellaneous Options
Enter Key N/A
Tab Key
Transmit Code ID Character
Prefix Value
Suffix 1 Value
Suffix 2 Value
Scan Data Transmission Format
FN1 Substitution Values
Transmit “No Read” Message
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval securPharm Decoding securPharm Output Formatting
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes
Image Capture Illumination
Image Capture Autoexposure
Fixed Exposure
Analog Gain
Digital Gain
Gain / Exposure Priority for
Snapshot Mode
N/A
45
99, 105
98, 104
100, 106
235
103, 109
94
1118
1752
1753
N/A
361
360
567
1232
1233
562
Snapshot Mode Timeout
Snapshot Aiming Pattern
323
300
Silence Operational Mode Changes 1293
Image Cropping 301
5E
SSI
Number
N/A
N/A
2Dh
63h, 69h
62h, 68h
64h, 6Ah
EBh
67h, 6Dh
2
F8h 04h 5Eh
F8h 06h D8h
F8h 06h D9h
N/A
F0h 69h
F4h D0h
F4h D1h
F1h 32h
F0h 43h
F0h 2Ch
F8h 05h 0Dh
F0h 2Dh
N/A
N/A
None
Default
7013 <CR><LF>
7013 <CR><LF>
Data As Is
7013 <CR><LF>
Disable
Disable
Disable
No Formatting
N/A
Enable
F0h 68h Enable
F4h F1h 37h 100
Analog Gain x 2
32
Autodetect
0 (30 seconds)
Enable
Disable (do not silence)
Disable
Crop to Pixel Addresses 315
316
317
318
302
F4h F0h 3Bh
F4h F0h 3Ch
F4h F0h 3Dh
F4h F0h 3Eh
F0h 2Eh
0 top
0 left
799 bottom
1279 right
Full Image Size (Number of Pixels)
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
419
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Image Brightness (Target White) 390
JPEG Image Options
JPEG Quality Value
299
305
JPEG Size Value
Image Enhancement
Image File Format Selection
Image Rotation
561
564
304
665
Bits per Pixel (BPP)
Signature Capture
Signature Capture Image File
Format Selection
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel
(BPP)
303
93
313
314
Signature Capture Width
Signature Capture Height
Signature Capture JPEG Quality
Video Mode Format Selector
Video View Finder
Target Video Frame Size
Video View Finder Image Size
Video Subsampling
Enable/Disable All Code Types
324
328
329
667
366
367
421
916
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
UPC-E
1
2
UPC-E1
EAN-8/JAN 8
12
4
SSI
Number 2
F0h 86h
F0h 2Bh
F0h 31h
F1h 31h
F1h 34h
F0h 30h
F1h 99h
F0h 2Fh
5Dh
F0h 39h
F0h 3Ah
180
Quality
65
160 kB
Low (1)
JPEG
0
8 BPP
Disable
JPEG
8 BPP
F4h F0h 6Eh 400
F4h F0h 6Fh 100
F0h A5h
F2h 94h
F0h 44h
F0h 48h
F0h 49h
F1h 9Bh
01h
02h
0Ch
04h
65
JPEG
Disable
2200 bytes
1700 bytes
1/4 Resolution
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Default
EAN-13/JAN 13 3 03h Enable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
420
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Bookland EAN 83
Bookland ISBN Format
ISSN EAN
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
User-Programmable
Supplementals
Supplemental 1:
Supplemental 2:
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental
Redundancy
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplemental
AIM ID
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit
576
617
16
579
580
80
672
40
41 Transmit UPC-E Check Digit
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit
UPC-A Preamble
UPC-E Preamble
UPC-E1 Preamble
42
34
35
36
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A
EAN/JAN Zero Extend
37
38
39
UCC Coupon Extended Code
Coupon Report
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone
Code 128
Code 128
Set Length(s) for Code 128
85
730
1289
8
209, 210
53h
F1h 40h
F1h 69h
10h
F1h 43h
F1h 44h
50h
F1h A0h
28h
29h
SSI
Number
2Ah
22h
23h
24h
25h
26h
27h
Enable
Enable
Enable
System Character
System Character
System Character
Disable
Disable
Disable
55h
F1h DAh
Disable
New Coupon Format
F8h 05h 09h Disable
08h
D1h, D2h
2
Disable
ISBN-10
Disable
Ignore
000
10
Combined
Enable
Any Length
Default
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
421
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14
ISBT 128
ISBT Concatenation
84
577
SSI
Number 2
0Eh
54h
F1h 41h
Enable
F1h 42h
DFh 10
F8h 04h E6h Honor
F1h EFh Security Level 1
F8h 04h B8h Disable
00h
0Dh
56h
E7h
12h, 13h
30h
2Bh
11h
F1h EEh
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1 to 55
Disable
Disable
Disable
Security Level 1
F8h 04h B9h Disable
Default
Enable
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Enable Check ISBT Table 578
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223
Code 128 <FNC4>
Code 128 Security Level
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone
Code 39
Code 39
Trioptic Code 39
1254
751
1208
0
13
86 Convert Code 39 to Code 32
(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix
Set Length(s) for Code 39
Code 39 Check Digit Verification
231
18, 19
48
43 Transmit Code 39 Check Digit
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion
Code 39 Security Level
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone
17
750
1209
Code 93
Code 93
Set Length(s) for Code 93
9
26, 27
09h
1Ah, 1Bh
Enable
1 to 55
Code 11
Code 11
Set Lengths for Code 11
Code 11 Check Digit Verification
10
28, 29
52
0Ah
1Ch, 1Dh
34h
Disable
4 to 55
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
422
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit
6
22, 23
49
44
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13
Febraban
82
1750
2Fh
SSI
Number 2
Disable
06h
16h, 17h
31h
2Ch
Enable
6 to 55
Disable
Disable
52h Disable
F8h 06h D6h Disable
Default
I 2 of 5 Security Level
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5
1121
1210
5
20, 21
F8h 04h 61h
F8h 04h BAh
05h
14h 15h
Security Level 1
Disable
Disable
1 to 55
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar
Set Lengths for Codabar
CLSI Editing
7
24, 25
54
55
07h
18h, 19h
36h
37h
Enable
4 to 55
Disable
Disable NOTIS Editing
Codabar Security Level
Codabar Upper or Lower Case
Start/
Stop Characters Detection
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit
Verification
Transmit Codabar Check Digit
MSI
MSI
Set Length(s) for MSI
1776
855
1784
704
11
30, 31
F8h 06h F0h
F2h 57h
F8h 06h F8h
F1h C0h
0Bh
1Eh, 1Fh
Security Level 1
Upper Case
Disable
Disable
Disable
4 to 55
MSI Check Digits 50 32h One MSI Check Digit
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
423
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Transmit MSI Check Digit 46
MSI Check Digit Algorithm
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone
51
1392
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit
408
618
619
620
622
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623
SSI
Number
2Eh
33h
2
Disable
Default
Mod 10/Mod 10
F8h 05h 70h Disable
F0h 98h
F1h 6Ah
F1h 6Bh
F1h 6Ch
F1h 6Eh
F1h 6Fh
Disable
Disable
4 to 55
Disable
Disable
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D
581
586
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
(formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1
DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar
Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
338
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1
DataBar Expanded Stacked
Convert GS1 DataBar to
UPC/EAN/JAN
GS1 DataBar Security Level
339
340
397
1706
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728
F1h 45h
F1h 4Ah
F0h 52h
F0h 53h
F0h 54h
F0h 8Dh
Disable
Regular
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
F8h 06h AAh Level 1
F1h D8h Level 3
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level
Security Level
78
77
4Eh
4Dh
1
1
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
424
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
1D Quiet Zone Level 1288
381 Intercharacter Gap Size
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C 341
Composite CC-A/B
Composite TLC-39
Composite Inverse
UPC Composite Mode
Composite Beep Mode
342
371
1113
344
398
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for
UCC/EAN Composite Codes
2D Symbologies
PDF417
MicroPDF417
Code 128 Emulation
Data Matrix
GS1 Data Matrix
427
15
227
123
292
1336
Data Matrix Inverse 588
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537
Maxicode
QR Code
Weblink QR
GS1 QR
MicroQR
Linked QR Mode
294
293
1947
1343
573
1847
SSI
Number
F0h 7Dh
2
F8h 05h 08h 1
Normal
Default
F0h 55h
F0h 56h
F0h 73h
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Disable - SR/DL models
Enable - HD/HL models
Disable
F8h 04h 59h Regular Only
F0h 58h
F0h 8Eh
F0h ABh
UPC Never Linked
Beep As Each Code Type is
Decoded
Disable
0Fh
E3h
7Bh
F0h 24h
F8h 05h 38h Disable
F1h 4Ch
F1h 19h
F0h 26h
F0h 25h
F7 07 9B
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Inverse Autodetect
Auto
Disable
Enable
Enable
F8h 05h 3Fh Enable
F1h 3Dh Enable
737h Linked QR Only
Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
425
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Aztec Inverse 589
Han Xin
Han Xin Inverse
Grid Matrix
Grid Matrix Inverse
Grid Matrix Mirror
DotCode
DotCode Inverse
DotCode Mirrored
DotCode Prioritize
1167
1168
1718
1719
1736
1906
1907
1908
1937
SSI
Number 2
F1h 4Dh
Default
Inverse Autodetect
F8h 04h 8Fh Disable
F8h 04h 90h Regular
F8h 06h B6h Disable
F8h 06h B7h Regular Only
F8h 06h C8h Regular Only
F8 07 72h Disable
F8 07 73h
F8 07 74h
F8 07 91h
Autodetect
Autodetect
Enable
DotCode Erasure Limit
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Postal Codes
US Postnet
2063
N/A
N/A
F8 08 0F
N/A
N/A
10
N/A
N/A
US Planet
Transmit US Postal Check Digit
UK Postal
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit
Japan Postal
Australia Post
Australia Post Format
Netherlands KIX Code
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent
UPU FICS Postal
Mailmark
89
90
95
91
96
290
291
718
326
592
611
1337
59h
5Ah
5Fh
5Bh
60h
F0h 22h
F0h 23h
F1h CEh
F0h 46h
F1h 50h
F1h 63h
F8h 05h 39h
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Autodiscriminate
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
426
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type N/A
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status
Handshaking
N/A
USB Keystroke Delay
USB Caps Lock Override
Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
N/A
N/A
N/A
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A
USB Fast HID N/A
USB Polling Interval
Keypad Emulation
N/A
N/A
Quick Keypad Emulation
Keypad Emulation with Leading
Zero
USB FN1 Substitution
N/A
N/A
Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock
Convert Case
USB Static CDC
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CDC Beep on <BEL> 150
TGCS (IBM) USB Direct I/O Beep 1360
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode
Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification
Version
N/A
N/A
N/A
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
96h
N/A
SSI
2
USB Keyboard HID
Enable
No Delay
Disable
Send Barcodes with
Unknown Characters
Disable
Enable
3 msec
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
None
Enable
Enable
F8h 05h 50h Honor
N/A
N/A
Ignore
Ignore
Version 2.2
Default
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parity
N/A
156
158
N/A
9Ch
9Eh
N/A
9600
None
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
427
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
Check Parity 151
Stop Bits
Software Handshaking
Host RTS Line State
Decode Data Packet Format
Host Serial Response Timeout
Host Character Timeout
Multipacket Option
Interpacket Delay
Event Reporting
Decode Event
Boot Up Event
Parameter Event
157
159
154
238
155
239
334
335
256
258
259
97h
9Dh
9Fh
9Ah
EEh
9Bh
EFh
SSI
Number
F0h 4Eh
F0h 4Fh
F0h 00h
F0h 02h
F0h 03h
2
Disable
1
ACK/NAK
Low
Default
Send Raw Decode Data
Low - 2 Seconds
Low - 200 msec
Multipacket Option 1
Minimum - 0 msec
Disable
Disable
Disable
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Data Bits
Check Receive Errors
Hardware Handshaking
Software Handshaking
Host Serial Response Timeout
RTS Line State
Beep on <BEL>
Intercharacter Delay
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options
Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standard
9600
None
1 Stop Bit
8-bit
Enable
None
None
2 Seconds
Low RTS
Disable
0 msec
Normal Operation
Send Barcode With
Unknown Characters
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
428
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address N/A
Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive
N/A
N/A
RS-485 Barcode Configuration
Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version
Barcodes with Unknown
Characters
N/A
N/A
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type N/A
N/A
Keystroke Delay
Intra-keystroke Delay
Alternate Numeric Keypad
Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation
Simulated Caps Lock
Caps Lock Override
Convert Case
Function Key Mapping
FN1 Substitution
Send Make and Break
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSI
2
None
Disable
Ignore
Ignore
Default
Original Specification
IBM AT Notebook
Send Barcodes with
Unknown Characters
No Delay
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Do Not Convert
Disable
Disable
Send Make and Break Scan
Codes
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A
OCR-A Variant
OCR-B
OCR-B Variant
MICR E13B
US Currency Serial Number
680
684
681
685
682
683
F1h A8h
F1h ACh
F1h A9h
F1h ADh
F1h AAh
F1h ABh
Disable
OCR-A Full ASCII
Disable
OCR-B Full ASCII
Disable
Disable
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
429
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
OCR Orientation
OCR Lines
OCR Minimum Characters
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset
OCR Quiet Zone
OCR Template
OCR Check Digit Modulus
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
Parameter
Number 1
687
695
547
688
700
691
689
690
686
SSI
Number 2
F1h AFh
F1h B3h
F1h B1h
F1h B2h
F1h AEh
F1h B7h
F1h 23h
F1h B0h
F1h BCh
Default
0 o
1
3
100
Selected font variant
50
999999999
1
121212121212
OCR Check Digit Validation
Inverse OCR
OCR Redundancy
694
856
1770
F1h B6h
F2h 58h
None
Regular
F8h 06h EAh Level 1
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode
IDC Symbology
IDC X Coordinate
IDC Y Coordinate
IDC Width
IDC Height
IDC Aspect
IDC File Format Selector
IDC Bits Per Pixel
IDC JPEG Quality
IDC Find Box Outline
IDC Minimum Text Length
IDC Maximum Text Length
IDC Captured Image Brighten
IDC Captured Image Sharpen
IDC Border Type
594
655
596
597
598
599
595
601
602
603
727
656
657
654
658
829
F1h 52h
F1h 8Fh
Off
001
F4h F1h 54h -151
F4h F1h 55h
F1h 56h
F1h 57h
F1h 53h
F1h 59h
F1h 5Ah
F1h 5Bh
F1h D7h
F1h 90h
F1h 91h
F1h 8Eh
F1h 92h
F2h 3Dh
-050
0300
0050
000
JPEG
8 BPP
065
Disable
00
00
Enable
Enable
None
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
430
Page
Number
Parameter Defaults
Table 29 Parameter Defaults (Continued)
Parameter
Parameter
Number 1
IDC Delay Time 830
IDC Zoom Limit
IDC Maximum Rotation
651
652
Digimarc Digital Watermarks
Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver’s License Parsing
Parsing Driver’s License Data
Fields
Driver’s License Parse Field
Barcodes
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
Parser Version ID Barcode
Set Default Parameter
Output Gender as M or F
Date Format
No Separator
Send Keystroke
Control Characters
Keyboard Characters
Parsing Rule Example
Embedded Driver’s License
Parsing ADF Example
1687
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
SSI
Number
F2h 3Eh
F1h 8Bh
F1h 8Ch
2
F8h 06h 97h
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
000
000
00
Disable
Default
No Driver’s License Parsing
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CCYYMMDD
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
Page
Number
431
Numeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the barcode below.
Cancel
Numeric Barcodes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered barcode(s).
0
1
2
3
432
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes (continued)
4
5
6
7
8
9
433
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following barcode.
Cancel
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Space
#
$
434
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
%
*
+
-
.
/
!
435
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
“
‘
)
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
;
436
:
(
&
=
Alphanumeric Barcodes
<
>
?
@
[
\
437
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
]
^
_
`
438
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
NOTE : Do not confuse the following barcodes with those on the numeric keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
439
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
6
7
8
9
End of Message
Cancel
440
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
A
B
C
D
E
F
441
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
G
H
I
J
K
L
442
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
M
N
O
P
Q
R
443
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
S
T
U
V
W
X
444
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
Y
Z a b c d
445
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
e f g h i j
446
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
k l m n o p
447
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
q r s t u v
448
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
w x y z
{
|
449
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
}
~
450
ASCII Character Sets
Introduction
NOTE : For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the barcode special character ($ + %
/) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B , it transmits as b , %J as ?
, and %V as @ .
Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table 30 ASCII Character Set
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
1000
Full ASCII Code 39
%U
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
CTRL 2 NUL
1001 $A CTRL A SOH
1002 $B CTRL B STX
1003 $C CTRL C ETX
1004 $D CTRL D EOT
1005 $E CTRL E ENQ
1006 $F CTRL F ACK
1007
1008
$G
$H
CTRL G
CTRL H/ BACKSPACE 1
CTRL I/ HORIZONTAL TAB 1
BELL
BCKSPC
1009 $I HORIZ TAB
1010 $J CTRL J LF/NW LN
1011 $K CTRL K VT
1012
1013
$L
$M
CTRL L
CTRL M/ ENTER 1
FF
CR/ENTER
1014 $N CTRL N SO
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246
Mapping on page 306 . Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
451
ASCII Character Sets
Table 30 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
1015
Full ASCII Code 39
$O
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
CTRL O SI
1016 $P CTRL P DLE
1017 $Q CTRL Q DC1/XON
1018 $R CTRL R DC2
1019 $S CTRL S DC3/XOFF
1020 $T CTRL T DC4
1021 $U CTRL U NAK
1022 $V CTRL V SYN
1023 $W CTRL W ETB
1024 $X CTRL X CAN
1025 $Y CTRL Y EM
1026 $Z CTRL Z SUB
1027 %A CTRL [ ESC
1028 %B CTRL \ FS
1029 %C CTRL ] GS
1030 %D CTRL 6 RS
1031 %E CTRL US
1032 Space Space Space
1033 /A !
!
1034 /B “ "
1035 /C # #
1036 /D $ $
1037 /E % %
1038 /F & &
1039 /G ‘ ‘
1040 /H ( (
1041 /I ) )
1042 /J * *
1043 /K + +
1 The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
Mapping on page 306 . Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
452
ASCII Character Sets
Table 30 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
1044 /L
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
, ,
1045 -
1046 .
.
.
1047 /o / /
1048 0 0 0
1049 1 1 1
1050 2 2 2
1051 3 3 3
1052 4 4 4
1053 5 5 5
1054 6 6 6
1055 7 7 7
1056 8 8 8
1057 9 9 9
1058 /Z : :
1059 %F ; ;
1060 %G < <
1061 %H = =
1062 %I > >
1063 %J ?
?
1064 %V @ @
1065 A A A
1066 B B B
1067 C C C
1068 D D D
1069 E E E
1070 F F F
1071 G G G
1072 H H H
1 The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
Mapping on page 306 . Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
453
ASCII Character Sets
Table 30 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
1073 I
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only)
I I
1074 J J J
1075 K K K
1076 L L L
1077 M M M
1078 N N N
1079 O O O
1080 P P P
1081 Q Q Q
1082 R R R
1083 S S S
1084 T T T
1085 U U U
1086 V V V
1087 W W W
1088 X X X
1089 Y Y Y
1090 Z Z Z
1091 %K [ [
1092 %L \ \
1093 %M ] ]
1094 %N ^ ^
1095 %O _ _
1096 %W ‘ `
1097 +A a a
1098 +B b b
1099 +C c c
1100 +D d d
1101 +E e e
1 The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
Mapping on page 306 . Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
454
ASCII Character Sets
Table 30 ASCII Character Set (Continued)
ASCII Value
(Prefix/Suffix Value)
1102 +F
Full ASCII Code 39
Encode Char
Keystroke
ASCII Character
(Applies to RS-232 Only) f f
1103 +G g g
1104 +H h h
1105 +I i i
1106 +J j j
1107 +K k k
1108 +L l l
1109 +M m m
1110 +N n n
1111 +O o o
1112 +P p p
1113 +Q q q
1114 +R r r
1115 +S s s
1116 +T t t
1117 +U u u
1118 +V v v
1119 +W w w
1120 +X x x
1121 +Y y y
1122 +Z z z
1123 %P { {
1124 %Q I |
1125 %R } }
1126 %S ~ ~
1127 Undefined
7013 ENTER
1 The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
Mapping on page 306 . Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
455
Table 31 ALT Key Character Set
ALT Keys
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2075
2076
2077
2078
2071
2072
2073
2074
2083
2084
2085
2086
2079
2080
2081
2082
2087
2088
2089
2090
ASCII Character Sets
ALT O
ALT P
ALT Q
ALT R
ALT S
ALT T
ALT U
ALT V
ALT W
ALT X
ALT Y
ALT Z
ALT G
ALT H
ALT I
ALT J
ALT K
ALT L
ALT M
ALT N
Keystroke
ALT 2
ALT A
ALT B
ALT C
ALT D
ALT E
ALT F
456
ASCII Character Sets
Table 32 GUI Key Character Set
GUI Key
3000
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3065
3066
3067
3068
3054
3055
3056
3057
Keystroke
Right Control Key
GUI 0
GUI 1
GUI 2
GUI 3
GUI 4
GUI 5
GUI 6
GUI 7
GUI 8
GUI 9
GUI A
GUI B
GUI C
GUI D
3073
3074
3075
3076
3069
3070
3071
3072
GUI E
GUI F
GUI G
GUI H
GUI I
GUI J
GUI K
GUI L
3077
3078
3079
3080
GUI M
GUI N
GUI O
GUI P
3081
3082
GUI Q
GUI R
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
457
ASCII Character Sets
Table 32 GUI Key Character Set (Continued)
GUI Key
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
Keystroke
GUI S
GUI T
GUI U
GUI V
GUI W
GUI X
GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
Table 33 PF Key Character Set
PF Keys
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4013
4014
4015
4016
4009
4010
4011
4012
Keystroke
PF 1
PF 2
PF 3
PF 4
PF 5
PF 6
PF 7
PF 8
PF 9
PF 10
PF 11
PF 12
PF 13
PF 14
PF 15
PF 16
458
Table 34 F Key Character Set
F Keys
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5012
5013
5014
5015
5008
5009
5010
5011
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5016
5017
5018
5019
Table 35 Numeric Key Character Set
Numeric Keypad
6042
6043
6044
6045
ASCII Character Sets
459
F 12
F 13
F 14
F 15
F 8
F 9
F 10
F 11
Keystroke
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 5
F 6
F 7
F 20
F 21
F 22
F 23
F 24
F 16
F 17
F 18
F 19
Keystroke
*
+
Undefined
-
ASCII Character Sets
Table 35 Numeric Key Character Set (Continued)
Numeric Keypad
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
Table 36 Extended Key Character Set
Extended Keypad
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7011
7012
7013
7014
7007
7008
7009
7010
Keystroke
Break
Delete
Pg Up
End
Pg Dn
Pause
Scroll Lock
Backspace
Tab
Print Screen
Insert
Home
Enter
Escape
Keystroke
.
0
/
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
9
Enter
Num Lock
460
ASCII Character Sets
Table 36 Extended Key Character Set (Continued)
Extended Keypad
7015
7016
7017
7018
Keystroke
Up Arrow
Dn Arrow
Left Arrow
Right Arrow
461
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers
U
V
X
S
T z
P00
M
N
R
K
L
H
J
F
G
D
E
Table 37 Symbol Code Characters
Code Character
A
Code Type
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B
C
Code 39, Code 32
Codabar
Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated
Code 93
Interleaved 2 of 5
Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
Code 11
MSI
GS1-128
Bookland EAN
Trioptic Code 39
Coupon Code
GS1 DataBar Family
Matrix 2 of 5
UCC Composite, TLC 39
Chinese 2 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
Aztec, Aztec Rune
Data Matrix
462
Programming Reference
P0G
P0H
P0Q
P0X
P0A
P0B
P0C
P0D
P04
P05
P06
P08
P09
Table 37 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
P01 QR Code, MicroQR
P02
P03
Maxicode
US Postnet
US Planet
Japan Postal
UK Postal
Netherlands KIX Code
Australia Post
Code Type
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
UPU FICS Postal
Mailmark
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
GS1 Data Matrix
Han Xin
GS1 QR
Signature Capture
AIM Code Identifiers
Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93) c = Code Character (see
)
m = Modifier Character (see Table 39 )
e
F d
E
Table 38 Aim Code Characters
Code Character
A
Code Type
Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,
Coupon (Code 128 portion)
Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix
UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
GS1 DataBar Family
Codabar
463
Programming Reference z
X
Q
S
L2
M
U
I h
L
Table 38 Aim Code Characters (Continued)
Code Character
G Code 93
H Code 11
Code Type
Han Xin
Interleaved 2 of 5
PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
]g
TLC 39
MSI
QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR
Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
Maxicode
Aztec, Aztec Rune
Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal,
Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/ Intelligent Mail, UPU
FICS Postal, Mailmark, Signature Capture
Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table 39 .
Table 39 Modifier Characters
Code Type Option Value
Code 39 0
1
3
4
5
Option
No check character or Full ASCII processing.
Reader has checked one check character.
Reader has checked and stripped check character.
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked one check character.
7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII barcode with check character W, A+I+MI+DW , is transmitted as
]A7 AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic barcode 412356 is transmitted as ]X0 412356
464
Programming Reference
Table 39 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Code 128 0
Option Value Option
Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
I 2 of 5
2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 barcode with Function 1 character
FNC1
AIMID is transmitted as ] C1 AIMID
in the first position,
0 No check digit processing.
Codabar
Code 93
MSI
D 2 of 5
UPC/EAN
Bookland EAN
ISSN EAN
1
3
Reader has validated check digit.
Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I0 4123
0 No check digit processing.
1
3
Reader has checked check digit.
Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F0 4123
0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0 012345678905
0 Check digits are sent.
1 No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI barcode 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M1 4123
0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 barcode 4123, is transmitted as ]S0 4123
0 Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e., 13 digits for UPC-A,
UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1
2
Two digit supplemental data only.
Five digit supplemental data only.
3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A or
UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
EAN-8 data packet.
4
Example: A UPC-A barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E0 0012345678905
0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0 123456789X
0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0 123456789X
465
Programming Reference
Table 39 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Code 11 0
Option Value
Single check digit
1 Two check digits
3
GS1 DataBar
Family
Option
Check characters validated but not transmitted.
No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar
Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application
Identifier “01”.
Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using
Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
EAN.UCC
Composites (GS1
DataBar, GS1-128,
2D portion of UPC composite)
0
1
Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode 0110012345678902 is transmitted as
]e 00110012345678902.
Native mode transmission.
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
Standard data packet.
Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol separator character.
2
PDF417,
Micro PDF417
3
1
0
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).
1
2
Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology specifications.
Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether data byte 92
DEC
has been doubled in transmission.
Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel
Interpretation). All data characters 92
DEC
are doubled.
Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character transmission protocol). Data characters 92
DEC
are not doubled. Note:
When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences cannot be transmitted.
3
4
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is
903-907, 912, 914, 915.
The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 908-909.
5 The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 barcode ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted as ]L2ABCD.
466
Programming Reference
Table 39 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Data Matrix 0
Option Value
ECC 000-140, not supported.
1 ECC 200.
Option
4
5
2
3
6
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol implemented.
GS1 Data Matrix
MaxiCode
QR Code
1
2
2
0
3
0
1
2
3
ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary message.
Model 1 symbol.
Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
GS1 QR
4
5
6
3
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second position.
Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first position.
Aztec
Han Xin
0
C
0
1
Aztec symbol.
Aztec Rune symbol.
Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data does not follow the AIM ECI protocol.
ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.
Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.
467
Programming Reference
Table 39 Modifier Characters (Continued)
Code Type
Grid Matrix, Grid
Matrix Inverse,
Grid Matrix Mirror
0
Option Value Option
No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Mailmark 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
468
Communication Protocol
Functionality
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface
lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
Table 40 Communication Interface Functionality
Functionality
Remote
Management
Image and Video
Transmission
Communication Interfaces
Data
Transmission
USB
HID Keyboard Emulation
CDC COM Port Emulation
SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation
IBM Table-top USB
IBM Hand-held USB
USB OPOS Hand-held
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging
Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging
Interface
RS-232
Standard RS-232
ICL RS-232
Fujitsu RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
469
Communication Protocol Functionality
Table 40 Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)
Communication Interfaces
CUTE
OPOS/JPOS
SSI
IBM 4690
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Keyboard Wedge
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
IBM AT Notebook
Data
Transmission
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Functionality
Remote
Management
Not Available
Not Available
Supported
Not Available
Supported
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Image and Video
Transmission
Not Available
Not Available
Supported
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
Not Available
470
Country Codes
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or Keyboard Wedge host.
The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see USB Interface
.
To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Country Code Pages .
Throughout the programming barcode menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (
*
).
*
Indicates Default
*
US English (North American) Feature/Option
471
Country Codes
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)
Scan the barcode corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB
host. For a keyboard wedge host, see
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 304
.
NOTE : When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets and issues the standard startup beep sequences.
NOTE : For best results when using international keyboards, enable
Quick Keypad Emulation on page 244 .
IMPORTANT :
• Some country keyboard barcode types are specific to certain Windows operating systems (that is, XP and Windows 7 or higher). Barcodes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted in the barcode captions.
• Use the French International barcode for Belgian French keyboards.
*
US English (North American)
US English (Mac)
Albanian
Arabic (101)
472
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Arabic (102)
Arabic (102) AZERTY
Azeri (Latin)
Azeri (Cyrillic)
Belarusian
Bosnian (Latin)
473
Bosnian (Cyrillic)
Country Codes (Continued)
Bulgarian (Latin)
Country Codes
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter)
(Bulgarian -Windows XP
Typewriter - Windows 7 or higher)
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual Standard
Chinese (ASCII)
474
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Chinese (Simplified)*
Chinese (Traditional)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see CKJ Decode Control .
Croatian
Czech
Czech (Programmer)
Czech (QWERTY)
Danish
475
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Dutch (Netherlands)
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France)
French (Canada) 95/98
476
French International
(Belgian French)
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
French (Canada) 2000/XP*
*There is also a country code barcode for
Multilingual Standard on page 474 . Be sure to select the
appropriate barcode for your host system.
Galician
German
Greek Latin
Greek (220) Latin
Greek (319) Latin
Greek
477
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Greek (220)
Greek (319)
Greek Polytonic
Hebrew Israel
Hungarian
Hungarian_101KEY
478
Icelandic
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Irish
Italian
Italian (142)
Japanese (ASCII)
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see
.
Kazakh
Korean (ASCII)
479
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Korean (Hangul)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see CKJ Decode Control .
Kyrgyz
Latin American
Latvian
Latvian (QWERTY)
Lithuanian
Lithuanian (IBM)
480
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Macedonian (FYROM)
Maltese_47KEY
Mongolian
Norwegian
Polish (214)
Polish (Programmer)
Portuguese (Brazil)
(Windows XP)
481
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)
Portuguese (Portugal)
Romanian
(Windows XP)
Romanian (Legacy)
(Windows 7 or higher)
Romanian (Standard)
(Windows 7 or higher)
482
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Romanian (Programmer)
(Windows 7 or higher)
Russian
Russian (Typewriter)
Serbian (Latin)
Serbian (Cyrillic)
Slovak
483
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Slovak (QWERTY)
Slovenian
Spanish
Spanish (Variation)
Swedish
Swiss French
484
Swiss German
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
Tatar
Thai (Kedmanee)
Turkish F
Turkish Q
UK English
Ukrainian
US Dvorak
485
Country Codes (Continued)
Country Codes
US Dvorak Left
US Dvorak Right
US International
Uzbek
Vietnamese
486
Country Code Pages
Introduction
.
If the default code page in
is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type, you do not need to scan a country code page barcode.
NOTE : ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Country Code Page Defaults
lists the code page default for each country keyboard.
Table 41 Country Code Page Defaults
Country Keyboard
US English (North American)
US English (Mac)
Albanian
Arabic 101
Arabic 102
Arabic 102 AZERTY
Azeri Latin
Azeri Cyrillic
Belarusian
Bosnian Latin
Bosnian Cyrillic
Bulgarian Latin
Bulgarian Cyrillic
Windows 1252
Mac CP10000
Windows 1250
Windows 1256
Windows 1256
Windows 1256
Windows 1254
Windows 1251
Windows 1251
Windows 1250
Windows 1251
Windows 1250
Windows 1251
Code Page Default
487
Country Code Pages
Table 41 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual
Croatian
Chinese ASCII
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
Czech
Czech Programmers
Czech QWERTY
Danish
Dutch Netherland
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France)
French (Canada) 95/98
French (Canada) 2000/XP
French International (Belgian French)
Galician
German
Greek Latin
Greek220 Latin
Greek319 Latin
Greek
Greek220
Greek319
Greek Polytonic
Hebrew Israel
Hungarian
Hungarian_101KEY
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1253
Windows 1252
Windows 1253
Windows 1253
Windows 1253
Windows 1253
Windows 1255
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Code Page Default
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1250
Windows 1252
Windows 936, GBK
Windows 950, Big5
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1257
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
488
Country Code Pages
Table 41 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Icelandic
Irish
Italian
Italian_142
Japanese ASCII
Japanese (Shift-JIS)
Kazakh
Korean ASCII
Korean (Hangul)
Kyrgyz Cyrillic
Latin America
Latvian
Latvian QWERTY
Lithuanian
Lithuanian_IBM
Macedonian -FYROM
Maltese_47KEY
Mongolian-Cyrillic
Norwegian
Polish_214
Polish Programmer
Portuguese Brazil
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2
Portuguese Portugal
Romanian
Romanian Legacy
Romanian Standard
Romanian Programmer
Russian
Russian Typewriter
Windows 1251
Windows 1252
Windows 1251
Windows 1252
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1251
Windows 1251
Code Page Default
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 932, Shift-JIS
Windows 1251
Windows 1252
Windows 949, Hangul
Windows 1251
Windows 1252
Windows 1257
Windows 1257
Windows 1257
Windows 1257
489
Country Code Pages
Table 41 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)
Country Keyboard
Serbian Latin
Serbian Cyrillic
Slovak
Slovak QWERTY
Slovenian
Spanish
Spanish Variation
Swedish
Swiss French
Swiss German
Tatar
Thai-Kedmanee
Turkish F
Turkish Q
Ukrainian
United Kingdom
United States
US Dvorak
US Dvorak Left Hand
US Dvorak Right Hand
US International
Uzbek Cyrillic
Vietnamese
Windows 1250
Windows 1251
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1250
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1251
Windows 874
Windows 1254
Windows 1254
Windows 1251
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1252
Windows 1251
Windows 1258
Code Page Default
490
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes
Scan the barcode corresponding to the country keyboard code page.
Windows 1250
Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1251
Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1252
Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1253
Greek
Windows 1254
Latin 5, Turkish
491
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 1255
Hebrew
Windows 1256
Arabic
Windows 1257
Baltic
Windows 1258
Vietnamese
Windows 874
Thai
492
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 20866
Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 932
Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 936
Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 54936
Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 949
Korean Hangul
493
Windows 950
Traditional Chinese Big5
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 437
Latin US
MS-DOS 737
Greek
MS-DOS 775
Baltic
MS-DOS 850
Latin 1
MS-DOS 852
Latin 2
494
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 855
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 857
Turkish
MS-DOS 860
Portuguese
MS-DOS 861
Icelandic
MS-DOS 862
Hebrew
495
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
MS-DOS 863
French Canada
MS-DOS 865
Nordic
MS-DOS 866
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869
Greek 2
496
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-1
Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-2
Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-3
Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-4
Latin 4, North European
ISO 8859-5
Cyrillic
497
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-6
Arabic
ISO 8859-7
Greek
ISO 8859-8
Hebrew
ISO 8859-9
Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10
Latin 6, Nordic
498
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
ISO 8859-11
Thai
ISO 8859-13
Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-14
Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-15
Latin 9
ISO 8859-16
Latin 10, South-Eastern European
499
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
UTF-8
UTF-16LE
UTF-16 Little Endian
UTF-16BE
UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000
Roman
500
CKJ Decode Control
Introduction
This chapter describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode decode through USB
HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
NOTE : Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK output.
CJK Control Parameters
Unicode Output Control
Parameter # 973
For a Unicode encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for unicode output:
• Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and
MBCS expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host.
NOTE : To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 505
.
• Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such as MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.
*Universal Output
(0)
501
Unicode Application Only
(1)
CKJ Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host
Parameter # 972
For a national standard encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows host:
• Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or
Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to
Unicode and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control
parameter to control Unicode output.
NOTE : To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See
Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 505 .
• Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to the host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends the hexadecimal Unicode value to the host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the
• Japanese Unicode Output
• Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output
• Simplified Chinese Unicode Output
• Korean Unicode Code Output
• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP)
• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7)
• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP)
• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)
NOTE : The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).
*Universal CJK Output
(0)
Japanese Unicode Output
(34)
(For Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
502
CKJ Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued)
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output
(1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output
(2)
Korean Unicode Output
(50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP)
(17)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7)
(19)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows XP)
(18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7)
(20)
503
CKJ Decode Control
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output
Parameter # 960
Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see
Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page 504 ). Although the default code page can not encode these
characters in a barcode, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 barcode. Scan the following barcode to output the
Unicode values by emulation mode.
NOTE : Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 barcode. After decoding, re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.
Use US English IME on Windows. See
Unicode Output Control on page 501 .
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters
Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri
Default code page: CP1251
Table 42 Missing Characters ғ Ғ ҳ Ҳ ө ә қ һ
Қ
Һ
Ө
Ә ү ң җ
₮
Ү
Ң
Җ ң ұ қ
Ң
Ұ
Қ
504
CKJ Decode Control
Table 42 Missing Characters (Continued) ҹ Ҹ ҝ Ҝ
Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard)
Default code page: CP1250
Table 43 Missing Characters ș Ș ț Ț
Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2)
Default code page: CP1252
Missing character:
₢
Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin
Default code page: CP1254
Missing characters: ә, Ә
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host
This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output
1.
2.
To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows:
Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor.
Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method , set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method]
3.
"EnableHexNumpad"="1"
If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value).
Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.
Adding CJK IME on Windows
To add the desired CJK input language:
1.
Click Start > Control Panel .
505
CKJ Decode Control
4.
5.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner.
Select Regional and Language Options .
Click the Language tab.
Under Supplemental Language Support , select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not already selected, and click Apply . This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available.
Under Text Services and Input Language , click Details .
Under Installed Services , click Add .
In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method
Editor (IME) to add.
Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system tray.
Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type.
Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.
506
CKJ Decode Control
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Simplified Chinese input method:
• Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa , then click the input bar to select Unicode or GBK NeiMa input.
Or
• Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows 7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience
Input Style , then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input .
507
CKJ Decode Control
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host
To select the Traditional Chinese input method:
• Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode
• Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code
• Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick . This option support both
Unicode and Big5 input.
508
Signature Capture
Introduction
CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.
There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form.
For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.
Code Structure
Signature Capture Area
A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in
.
Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box.
The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.
Figure 33 CapCode
509
Signature Capture
CapCode Pattern Structure
A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left and to the right of the CapCode pattern.
Figure 34 CapCode Structure
Capture Box
Quiet
Zone
Start
Separator Spaces
Stop Quiet
Zone
The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.
Start / Stop Patterns
lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.
Table 44 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions
Bar/Space Patterns
B
1
S
1
B
2
S
2
B
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
S
1
1
1
1
1
B
1
1
1
1
1
lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.
Table 45 User Defined CapCode Parameters
Parameter
Width
Height
Format
JPEG quality
Defined
Number of pixels
Number of pixels
JPEG, BMP, TIFF
1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)
Type
7
8
2
5
9
510
Signature Capture
Table 45 User Defined CapCode Parameters
Parameter
Bits Per Pixel
(not applicable to JPEG format)
1 (2 levels)
4 (16 levels)
8 (256 levels)
BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.
Defined
Dimensions
The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.
The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.
Data Format
inhibit barcode type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the barcode type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".
Table 46 Data Format
File Format
(1 byte)
JPEG - 1
BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
Type (1 byte)
, last column
Image Size
(4 bytes, BIG Endian)
Image Data
(Same bytes as in a data file.)
511
Signature Capture
Additional Capabilities
Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up.
A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a barcode. You can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.
Signature Boxes
illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes.
Figure 35 Acceptable Signature Boxes
Type 2:
Type 5:
Type 7:
Type 8:
Type 9:
512
Non-Parameter Attributes
(Attribute Data Dictionary)
Introduction
This chapter defines non-parameter attributes.
Attributes
Model Number
Attribute #533
Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example
DS9908-SR00004ZCWW.
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
18
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Serial Number
Attribute #534
Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example M1J26F45V .
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
16
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
513
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Date of Manufacture
Attribute #535
Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example 31OCT18 (which reads the 31st of October 2018).
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
7
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Date of First Programming
Attribute #614
Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 18MAY17 (which reads the 18th of May 2017).
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
7
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Configuration Filename
Attribute #616
The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.
NOTE : Scanning the Set Defaults barcode automatically changes the configuration filename to factory defaults.
To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to
Modified upon scanning any parameter barcode.
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
17
User Mode Access RW
Values Variable
514
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Beeper/LED
Attribute #6000
Activates the beeper and/or LED.
Type
Size (Bytes)
X
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values :
Beep / LED Action Value
1 high short beep
2 high short beeps
0
1
3 high short beeps
4 high short beeps
5 high short beeps
1 low short beep
4
5
2
3
2 low short beeps
3 low short beeps
4 low short beeps
5 low short beeps
1 high long beep
2 high long beeps
3 high long beeps
4 high long beeps
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
5 high long beeps
1 low long beep
2 low long beeps
3 low long beeps
4 low long beeps
5 low long beeps
Fast warble beep
Slow warble beep
High-low beep
Low-high beep
High-low-high beep
Low-high-low beep
High-high-low-low beep 26
Green LED off 42
Green LED on
Red LED on
Red LED off
43
47
48
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
515
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Parameter Defaults
Attribute #6001
This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.
Type
Size (Bytes)
X
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 0 = Restore Defaults
1 = Restore Factory Defaults
2 = Write Custom Defaults
Parameter Buffer
Attribute #6002
Retrieves entire parameter buffer.
Type
Size (Bytes)
User Mode Access
Values
A
Variable
R
Variable
Beep on Next Bootup
Attribute #6003
This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.
Type
Size (Bytes)
X
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 0 = Disable beep on next bootup
1 = Enable beep on next bootup
Reboot
Attribute #6004
This attribute initiates a device reboot.
Type
Size (Bytes)
X
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values N/A
516
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Host Trigger Session
Attribute #6005
This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.
Type
Size (Bytes)
X
N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 1 = Start Host Trigger Session
0 = Stop Host Trigger Session
Firmware Version
Attribute #20004
The scanner's operating system version. For example, NBRFMAAC or PAAAABS00-007-R03D0 .
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Device Class
Attribute #20007
Description of the device's hardware, for example, Imager or Cordless 2D Imager .
Type
Size (Bytes)
User Mode Access
Values
S
18
R
Variable
Scankit Version
Attribute #20008
Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example SKIT4.33T02
.
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
517
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
Combined Firmware Version
Attribute #20009
Reports firmware version of the multiple CPU's on the single product with space delimiters, for example
NBRPUAAA NBRPUDAA .
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
RSM Version
Attribute #20011
Identifies the RSM version resident in the device, for example 2.0
.
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
3
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Top Level Release Name
Attribute #20012
Returns top level combined image firmware name, for example CAAABS00-008-R00 .
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Imagekit Version
Attribute #20013
Identifies the 2D decode package resident in the device, for example IMGKIT_4.04T02
.
Type
Size (Bytes)
S
Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
518
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)
DL Parser Version
Attribute #25011
Type
Size (Bytes)
Values
Type Array
Variable
Variable
DL Parser Activated
Attribute #25012
Type
Size (bytes)
Values
Flag
1
0 = Not Activated (SR Model)
1 = 1 = Activated (DL/HL Model)
ScanSpeed Analytics
IMPORTANT : Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
Identifies problematic barcodes to speed up scanning processes.
Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software allows you to visually identify barcodes that slow down processing and impact efficiency. Over time, the software uses collected data to eliminate poor performing barcodes from inventory. For more information go to zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics .
519
ScanSpeed Analytics
Introduction
IMPORTANT : Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
This chapter describes the Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software that allows the identification of barcodes that slow down processes. Over time, the collected data can be used to eliminate poor performing barcodes from inventory.
When scanners capture and read data faster, processes run faster.
For more information go to zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics .
Histogram Decode Information
information: Decode Count; Minimum Decode Time; Slowest Decode Time; Average Decode Time; Slowest
Decode Data; and, ScanSpeed Histogram.
ScanSpeed Histogram is an array of eight items of double WORD (4 bytes). Each bin holds the count of decoded barcodes per range of decode time. For example, the range of Bin1 decode times is from 0 ms to 75 ms. All the Bin time ranges are show below:
Bin1 <= 75ms
Bin2 <= 110ms
Bin3 <= 170ms
Bin4 <= 300ms
Bin5 <= 600ms
Bin6 <= 1000ms
Bin7 <= 1500ms
Bin8 > 1500ms
123Scan displays this histogram data in its Statistics tab shown in
.
520
ScanSpeed Analytics
Figure 36 123Scan Statistics Tab - Histogram Data
Table 47 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal
Value
Hex Value
(Shown in
Little
Endian
Format)
Minimum
Decode
Time
Slowest
Decode
Time
(Max
Decode
Time)
Average
Decode
Time
UPC 15421 0x3D,
0x3C
15424 15425 15426
EAN/JAN 15428 15431 15432 15433
2 of 5 15449
0x44,
0x3C
0x59,
0x3C
15452 15453 15454
Codabar 15456 15459 15460 15461
Code 11
Code 128
Code 39
15477
15442
15435
0x60,
0x3C
0x75,
0x3C
0x52,
0x3C
0x4B,
0x3C
15480
15445
15438
15481
15446
15439
15482
15447
15440
Slowest
Decode
Data
15707
15709
15715
15717
15723
15713
15711
ScanSpeed
Histogram
15706
15708
15714
15716
15722
15712
15710
521
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 47 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal
Value
Hex Value
(Shown in
Little
Endian
Format)
Minimum
Decode
Time
Slowest
Decode
Time
(Max
Decode
Time)
Average
Decode
Time
Slowest
Decode
Data
Code 93 15463 0x67,
0x3C
15466 15467 15468 15719
Composite 15519 15522 15523 15524 15735
GS1 DataBar 15512
0x9F,
0x3C
0x98,
0x3C
15515 15516 15517 15733
MSI 15470 15473 15474 15475 15721
Data Matrix
Postal Codes
15491
15484
15505
0x6E,
0x3C
0x83,
0x3C
0x7C,
0x3C
0x91,
0x3C
15494
15487
15508
15495
15488
15509
15496
15489
15510
15727
15725
15731
QR 15498 15501 15502 15503 15729
Aztec
OCR
Maxicode
15533
15526
15659
GS1-Data Matrix 15673
GS1-QR Code
Coupon
Other 1D
Other 2D
Other
15680
15666
15540
15547
15554
0x39,
0x3D
0x40,
0x3D
0x32,
0x3D
0xB4,
0x3C
0x8A,
0x3C
0xAD,
0x3C
0xA6,
0x3C
0x2B,
0x3D
0xBB,
0x3C
0xC2,
0x3C
15536
15529
15662
15676
15683
15669
15543
15550
15557
15537
15530
15663
15677
15684
15670
15544
15551
15558
15538
15531
15664
15678
15685
15671
15545
15552
15559
15739
15737
15755
15747
15749
15757
15741
15743
15745
ScanSpeed
Histogram
15718
15734
15732
15720
15726
15724
15730
15728
15738
15736
15754
15746
15748
15756
15740
15742
15744
522
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 47 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)
Barcode Name
Decode Count
Decimal
Value
Hex Value
(Shown in
Little
Endian
Format)
Minimum
Decode
Time
Slowest
Decode
Time
(Max
Decode
Time)
Average
Decode
Time
Slowest
Decode
Data
Unused Statistic
ID
19999 0x1F,
0x4E
19999 19999 19999 19999
ScanSpeed
Histogram
19999
Example
The UPC data below is taken from the first row of
above.
UPC DECODE COUNT
Attribute #: 15421
Type: DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode decode count, including all variants (UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, etc.).
UPC MINIMUM DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15424
Type: DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Minimum Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15425
Type: DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Slowest Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC AVERAGE DECODE TIME
Attribute #: 15426
Type: DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the Average Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE DATA
Attribute #: 15707
Type: Array of BYTE (25 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode data with the Slowest Decode Time.
UPC SCANSPEED HISTOGRAM
Attribute #: 15706
Type: Array of DWORD (32 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode ScanSpeed Histogram.
523
ScanSpeed Analytics
Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode
The user can configure the scanner to store the image(s) of the slowest decoded barcode.
Table 48 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode
Attribute #
1755
Type
Array of
WORD
Property
RW
Default Value
Default format =
{0x1F, 0x4E}
0x1F, 0x4E
No image retained
Barcode name =
Unused Statistic ID
Decimal value = 19999 see last row in
0x3D, 0x3C
Image retained for UPC
Decimal value = 15421
Sample image retained for UPC only = {0x3D,
0x3C}
Description
Attribute 1755 is named List of Stored
Images.
This attribute defines which image, by symbology, of the slowest decoded barcode will be stored in the scanner.
One symbology image can be stored in the scanner.
Note :
{0x1F, 0x4E} = a 1 WORD value which is in little-endian format.
1756 WORD RW 0 Attribute 1756 is named Threshold To
Store Slowest Decode Barcode Image.
This attribute defines the threshold above which the scanner stores the image of the slowest decoded barcode.
Specify a Histogram Bin value (0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 or 7).
The purpose of setting up this threshold is to reduce the barcode image storage frequency.
0 - No threshold check (default value)
1 - Specifies the decode time threshold as Histogram Bin 1 value of 75 ms
Similarly, the other Histogram Bins specify the corresponding threshold time as follows:
Bin 1 <= 75ms
Bin 2 <= 110ms
Bin 3 <= 170ms
Bin 4 <= 300ms
Bin 5 <= 600ms
Bin 6 <= 1000ms
Bin 7 <= 1500ms
524
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 48 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode (Continued)
Attribute # Type Property Default Value Description
6036 WORD WO N/A Attribute 6036 is named Retrieve Slowest
Decoded Barcode Image.
The image must be retrieved using the
SNAPI communication protocol.
This attribute allows you to retrieve from the scanner a single image, by symbology, of the slowest decoded data.
For example, to retrieve the slowest decoded barcode image for a UPC symbology, enter its hex value, 0x3D,
0x3C (decimal value 15421), using a SET command.
See Table 47 on page 521 for symbology
hex and decimal values.
525
Sample Barcodes
IMPORTANT : To read a sample barcode the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the appropriate Enable barcode in
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
0
12345 67890
5
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on
34
0 12345 67890
526
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on
Sample Barcodes
98765
0 12345 67890
UPC-E
0 425261 4
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on
0 425261
98
527
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on
Sample Barcodes
87654
0 425261
EAN-8
EAN-13, 100%
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 0
528
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on
Sample Barcodes
12
3 456789 012340
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on
54321
3 456789 012340
Code 128
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
529
GS1-128
Sample Barcodes
(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17
Code 39
123ABC
Code 93
530
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits
Sample Barcodes
2468101275
Interleaved 2 of 5
12345678901231
MSI with 2 Check Digits
123455834
531
Chinese 2 of 5
Sample Barcodes
45454545454
Matrix 2 of 5
Korean 3 of 5
223344
1400230
532
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
7612341562341
GS1 DataBar Truncated
(01)00614141999996
GS1 DataBar Stacked
533
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
534
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Data Matrix
535
QR Code
GS1 QR
GS1 Data Matrix
Sample Barcodes
Maxicode
536
Sample Barcodes
MicroQR
Aztec
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456
7890123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123
456789
Grid Matrix
NOTE Grid Matrix must be enabled to read the following barcode (see
).
537
Han Xin
Postal Codes
US Postnet
UK Postal
Japan Postal
Sample Barcodes
5008861
538
Australian Post
Sample Barcodes
39549554
OCR
OCR-A
OCR-B
MICR E13B
539
US Currency
Sample Barcodes
540
Index
Numerics
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
123scan LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2D bar codes
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2D barcodes
dotcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
dotcode erasure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
dotcode inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
dotcode mirrored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
dotcode prioritize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
ADF programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 363
aiming
pattern, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
pattern, hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
pattern, snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
aiming pattern
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ASCII character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
attributes, non-parameter
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
A
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
accessories
EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34, 35
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
541
B bar codes
1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
CJK
non-CJK UTF bar code output . . . . . . . . . . . 504
output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
codabar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . 155
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
composite
beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Index
542
digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
driver’s license date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
driver’s license gender format . . . . . . . . . . . .383
no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
parsing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
convert to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . .199
GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . .195
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
IBM
inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . .298
beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
IDC
aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
border type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
captured image brighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
captured image sharpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
find box outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
maximum rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
maximum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
minimum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
X coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Y coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
zoom limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
keyboard wedge
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 304
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
send make and break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
OCR
check digit validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
inverse OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
maximum characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
MICR E13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
minimum character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
OCR-A variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
OCR-B variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Index
543
quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
US currency serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
postal
Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .229
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . .232
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
RS-232
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 288
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
SSI
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
host character timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
UPC/EAN supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . 140
UPC/EAN/JAN
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . 140
USB
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . . 245
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
weblink QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
barcodes
analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
beep duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
beep tones
special beep tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Index
544
standard tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
continuous barcode read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
decode range limit (hands-free) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
dotcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
dotcode erasure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
dotcode inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
dotcode mirrored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
dotcode prioritize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .104
grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
hand-held trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
hands-free decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
hands-free mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 101
illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
image capture
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
macro PDF
abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
pickup activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
PID type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
PID value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
product information
manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Index
software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
securPharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
securPharm output formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
symbologies
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
triggered timeout, same symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
unique barcode reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
UPC/EAN/JAN
USB
EAN/JAN extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
user preferences
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
video mode format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
video subsampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
beep
video view finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
beep tone adjustment
special beep tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
standard beep tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
beeper
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
suppress on power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
beeper indicators
123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
545
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
C cables
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
character sets
ALT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
extended key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
F key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
GUI key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
numeric key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
PF key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
country keyboard missing characters . . . . . . . . .504
decode setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
cleaning the devices
approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Index
code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526, 530
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
code identifiers
AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
communication protocol
cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
composite bar codes
beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
configurations
scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
connecting
IBM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
conventions
notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
cropping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
custom tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
D
data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537, 538, 539
data parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
546
decode range limit (hands-free) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
decode ranges
ds9908-hd/hl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
ds9908-sr/dl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
DL parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
downloading custom tone
via scanner SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
driver’s license parsing
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
field parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
gender format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
E
EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
error indications
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
exposure options
analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .104
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 101
Index
F features, scanner
firmware
flash update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
G gain
grid matrix bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
gs1 data matrix bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
GS1 databar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . . 197
GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . . . 199
GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
GS1 QR bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
H
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
hand-held touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
host specific indicators
123scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
host types
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
I
IBM
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
547
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
bar code acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
capture region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
demonstrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
image post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
quick start form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
sample setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 101
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
image capture
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
image capture beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . .39
image options
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
interface
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
J
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
K keyboard types (country codes)
Index
Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chinese (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Chinese (Traditional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Korean (Hangul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
548
Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
keyboard wedge
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
keyboard map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
L
LED indicators
123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Index
parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
M
macro PDF beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
microQR code bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
mounting
wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
mounting bracket
table top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
wall mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
multicode data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
N non-parameter attributes
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
549
scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
O
OCR
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
P
parameter programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
PDF417 barcodes
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
pickup activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
pinouts
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
postal code bar codes
Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . . .232
postal code barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
power supply
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
product id (PID) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
product information
manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
report software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Q
QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537, 538, 539
Index
R
RS-232
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
RSM
host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . . 258
S sample bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537, 538, 539
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537, 538, 539
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
scanning
aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
scanning beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
security
1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
setup
connecting a keyboard wedge host . . . . . . . . . . 300
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
inserting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
550
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
signature boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
start and stop patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
SMS LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
software tools
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
speaker
speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
SSI
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251, 255
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
event reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 255
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
symbologies
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
tone
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
trigger mode, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
U unicode
output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
UPC/EAN bar codes
supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes
bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
decode supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . 140
UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes
EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
USB
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
V video
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
subsampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
video view finder
frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
W
weblink QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Index
551
www.zebra.com
ડાઉનલોડ કરો
જાહેર લિંક અપડેટ થઈ
તમારી ચેટની જાહેર લિંક અપડેટ કરવામાં આવી છે. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
દસ્તાવેજ જાહેર લિંક
જાહેરાત
